Home

KLN 89B Pilot`s Guide

Contents

1. 4 6 Delete a waypoint remark from the OTH 5 page 3 66 Delete an individual waypoint in a SID or STAR procedure 5 33 Display the nearest airport continuously sss 3 29 Enable the voltage alert feature 3 67 Enter a user defined waypoint remark on the USR 3 57 Enter a waypoint identifier 3 13 Enter an airport remark on the APT 6 3 51 Enter the local magnetic variation manually on the SET 2 page 4 47 Fly direct toa re bee Oed an 3 33 Fly direct to a waypoint in the active flight plan FPL 0 4 12 Initialize the position from the SET 1 page 3 19 Perform a manual RAIM Calculation 5 28 Recenter the D Bar by going direct to the active waypoint 3 35 Replace an existing approach or delete an approach 5 9 TSelecha SID ur M T 5 30 TSelecha uuu uuu u unu 5 31 Select a VOR or NDB by navaid 3 24 Select a waypoint by identifier from a waypoint page 3 21 Introduction TO SEE PAGE Select a waypoint by scanning with th
2. 9 e Chapter 4 a A e c e a C5 ET ce 3 gt T Advanced GPS Operation 4 1 2 VIEWING DISTANCE AND DESIRED TRACK BETWEEN STORED FLIGHT PLAN WAYPOINTS The stored flight plan FPL 1 25 pages have a field to the right of each waypoint in the flight plan This field may be used to display the cumulative distance Dis to each waypoint or the magnetic desired track Dtk from the previous waypoint If you have more than three waypoints in the stored flight plan you may wish to view flight data for waypoints which are not displayed on the screen If this is the case turn on the cursor esr and use the right outer knob to scroll down the flight plan until the waypoint of interest is on the screen This display will default to the distance presentation at power on The area in the upper right hand area of the screen is a cyclic field To cycle between distance and desired track display on a num bered flight plan page 1 Turn on the cursor c55 it will come up over the cyclic field which in this case is displaying distance Dis in nautical miles or kilometers figure 4 8 Figure 4 8 2 Press ker The cyclic field will change to magnetic desired track Dtk figure 4 9 An additional press cycles back to Dis APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL Figure 4 9 4 1 3 ACTIVATING A NUMBERED FLIGHT PLAN To activate one of the previously create
3. 5 18 5 1 7 Example Approach On Airport Navaid 5 19 5 1 8 Example Approach DME Arc 5 22 5 1 9 Approach Problems 5 27 5 2 SID STAR Procedures 5 29 5 2 1 Selecung A SID cN uu banka masi 5 30 5 22 5elecung ASTAR Sium umu hu a kun nkhu 5 31 5 2 3 Editing a SID or STAR sees 5 32 5 2 4 Example of a SID Procedure 5 34 5 2 5 Example of a STAR Procedure 5 36 APPENDIX NAVIGATION TERMS A 1 APPENDIX B MESSAGE PAGE MESSAGES B 1 APPENDIX C SCRATCHPAD MESSAGES C 1 APPENDIX D ABBREVIATIONS D 1 SIATEABBREVIATIONS Lu uu cte dos us a Dia qasaqa D 1 CANADIAN PROVINCE ABBREVIATIONS D 2 COUNTRY ABBREVIATIONS D 2 ARTCC ABBREVIATIONS D 8 OTHER ABBREVIATIONS USED ON KLN 89 PAGES D 17 APPENDIX E LAT LON CONVERSIONS E 1 APPENDIX F GPS PRIMER J F 1 TOC 5 Table of Contents This page intentionally left blank TOC 6 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Introduction INTRODUCTION Congratulations for choosing the Bendix
4. aides 4 39 4 7 7 Activating a Waypoint While in the OBS Mode 4 39 4 7 8 Changing the CDI scale factor 4 40 4 8 The Fuel Management Pages 4 41 4 8 1 The Other 7 OTH 7 page 4 42 4 8 2 The Other 8 OTH 8 page 4 43 4 8 3 The Other 9 OTH 9 page 4 44 4 8 4 The Other 10 OTH 10 page 4 44 4 9 The Ait Data Pages a eiii a doce ola 4 44 4 9 1 The Other 11 OTH 11 page 4 45 4 9 2 The Other 12 OTH 12 page 4 46 4 10 Magnetic Variation 4 46 4 11 Using the Take home Mode 4 48 5 APPROACHES AND SID STARS KLN 89B ONLY 5 1 5 1 Non Precision Approach Operations 5 1 5 1 1 Selecting An Approach 5 5 5 1 2 Interpreting What You See 5 7 TOC 4 KLNS9 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Table of Contents 5 1 3 Changing Or Deleting An Approach Once Loaded Into The Flight Plan 5 9 5 1 4 Example Approach No Procedure Turn 5 10 5 1 5 Example Approach Off Airport Navaid 5 14 5 1 6 Example Approach Radar Vectors
5. OZE EEN pie tg JR QN ODOLL1e 88040 01 12adx3 TARE g RAA SWIM OSZ V noz j asinoa uagouddg 401284 I lu nos Burpue s atoqun swu 2S uiro 1 P ES 173033 101 Ol 620 H NOY EI HOA NOY 1940 ur10N uinos Bujpue 099 oo SYRII HLYOM u 4 NOSOnH ONY gue wi e e OZ ZEN n i SYN SVT1vO NOLONIJUY SINIdS HLHOM 14 ONIONY L3vHOuIV 11v SVX3L SYTIYO p ZZ SUM C S ZEN NS34D wo 952702 YORoudde gung 101585 G is dS buo Eo PUE 1 d 12 dx3 jul 01 620 H NOY BIA HOA NDY 1340 Q4JON ULDOS Burpug SwX3l NOLONITUV ov V xf S NOSIOQY NV QT314 3AQOT 5v 11v 0 1 JPO uaEQadde 814 Ik 059 101294 98dx3 luf O 620 H NOY EI HOA NOY 4043 u110N Bu pue ss Q SVX31 SYN SvX31 u KP Sv13 QiZ 18 1u 48317 85015 QODEL 1E 1u 8042 uny Uospng div TIJMSUVO 128dx3 SWIM 092 18 JUL uH 88017 asrno2 uagouiddg eur 4103234 1041 Burpeau SwXii WLINOSIA AR 4 OSE EA 1up 38810 O1 OFO Y NOV BIA HOA NOY Woly u1nos Burpum SYIM LZ Y sanas jeury NOSIQUY dT3Id4 3AO1 S 71 0 ONIONYT S t3roguni 9 3 fyynos Buipuey sialogeny Of 40 204 Wy JEAIQ 12 00 tunes Buipue1 si loqiani uoN 101994 128dx3 1U 33819 Dl DFO H NOY BIA HOA NOY ul614 ul39N Buipuseq Pll AOM 89 25 952109 yseord
6. 9 e Advanced GPS Operation To create a flight plan 1 Select the flight plan FPL pages with the right outer knob 2 Select a flight plan page preferably other than FPL 0 which does not contain a flight plan figure 4 1 If all of the flight plan pages contain flight plans refer to section 4 1 6 Deleting Figure 4 1 Flight Plans 3 Turn on the cursor NOTE The KLN 89 B flight plan operation is designed so that the first waypoint in the flight plan should always be the departure point Remember to enter the K P or C prefix for certain airports in the United States Alaska some but not all cases or Canada respec tively See section 2 3 ICAO Identifiers APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 4 Use the right inner knob to select the first character of the depar ture waypoint identifier figure 4 2 If you have set the default first waypoint character to K on the SET 5 page you will just need one turn clockwise see APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH section 3 4 2 Data Entry Figure 4 2 5 the right outer knob to move the flashing part of the cursor over the second character then select the desired character 6 Use the above procedure to select the entire identifier for the first waypoint figure 4 3 M APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 7 Press Let A waypoint page for the identifier just entered will be Fi
7. Chapter 5 N er d o cO a e a a e p Approaches and SID STARs In many cases ATC will not tell you explicitly which IAF to use In these cases you need to select an IAF which is closest to the route of flight that you expect If you expect radar vectors then the selection of the correct IAF is less important because you will be given vectors to the FAF and will not need to use the IAF 6 The KLN 89B next presents a list of waypoints that make up the approach Review these waypoints to make sure that you have selected the correct IAF If there are more than four waypoints in the approach you Figure 5 5 can move the cursor up to scroll the other waypoints into view by rotating the right outer knob 99 figure 5 5 gt gt 7 Move the cursor over ADD TO FPL 0 figure 5 6 and press Ent 8 The KLN 89B will then bring up the FPL O page and put the sequence of approach waypoints APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH in front of the airport reference Figure 5 7 point figure 5 7 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 5 6 NOTE At any time during the process of selecting an approach you can easily return to the previous step by pressing the button The waypoints that make up the approach procedure are loaded into the flight plan At the top of the list of approach waypoints is a head er that describes the approa
8. Approaches and SID STARs will remove the entire approach procedure from the active flight plan If the KLN 89B was in the approach arm or the approach active mode then deleting the approach will cause the KLN 89B to change back to en route mode This means that the CDI scale factor will change back to the default 5 0 NM scale 5 1 4 EXAMPLE APPROACH NO PROCEDURE TURN Now that you know the basics of inserting an approach into the flight plan we can now show the approach operation of the unit by several examples This first example will use the approach that was loaded into the flight plan in section 5 1 1 This example will show how the KLN 89B sequences through an approach and what type of annunci ations and scale factor changes can be expected The KLN 89B will remain in the familiar Leg mode so there will be no need to change between Leg and OBS mode in this example Refer to the approach plate for this approach figure 5 12 to see what the procedure looks like For this example it is assumed that you are on an active flight plan with the final destination being the Los Angeles International airport KLAX It is also assumed that ATC will not give you radar vectors during this approach 1 Load the VOR 25R approach to KLAX as demonstrated in sec tion 5 1 1 2 When you are within 30 NM of the airport the KLN 89B will auto matically arm the approach mode and provide the following message Press ALT To Set Baro The
9. Figure 3 3 When the internal test is complete the Power On page will automatically be replaced by the Self Test page figure 3 4 2 VOR NDB INT USR FPL CAL SET NOTE If the KLN 89 B is operating Figure 3 4 in the Take Home Mode the Take Home Warning Page figure 3 5 is displayed first and must be acknowledged by pressing Le See section 4 11 for more information on the Take Home mode gt Z APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL Figure 3 5 NOTE If the data base card is not installed in the KLN89 B a page will be displayed as in figure 3 6 Turn the KLN 89 B unit power back off and replace the data base card in the left WU NN SN side of the front panel Once the card Figure 3 6 is in place you may apply power once again and the unit will operate properly 2 Verify that the data displayed on the Self Test page is the same as is being displayed on the appropriate equipment in the aircraft which is interfaced to the KLN 89 B If the KLN 89 B is not connected to any other equipment in the aircraft you may skip to step 3 3 2 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation The distance field in the upper left corner always displays 34 5 nm or 63 9 km If the KLN 89 B is interfaced to a compatible indicator that displays DME distance the indicator should be displaying 34 5 nautical miles If the KLN 89 B is interfaced with a NAV indicator such as an HSI or a
10. 3 58 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation 2 Use the right inner knob to update the altimeter baro setting figure 3 171 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Line 3 displays the Minimum Safe Altitude MSA Figure 3 171 IMPORTANT The minimum safe altitude displayed is the altitude defined by Jeppesen as Grid Minimum Off Route Altitude Grid MORA This altitude is derived by Jeppesen for sectors which are one degree of latitude by one degree of longitude in size One degree of latitude is 60 nautical miles One degree of longitude is 60 nautical miles at the equator and progressively less than 60 nautical miles as one travels away from the equator One degree of longitude is approx imately 50 nautical miles at the southern most parts of the U S and is approximately 40 nautical miles at the northern most parts of the U S The MSA altitude information is contained in the data base and is updateed when the data base cartridge is updated The minimum safe altitude MSA provides reference point clearance within these one degree latitude by one degree longitude sectors Jeppesen defines a reference point as a natural Peak Knoll Hill etc or man made Tower Stack Tank Building etc object Jeppesen states the following about the Grid Minimum Off Route altitude Grid MORA values clear all reference points by 1000 feet in areas where the highest reference points are 5000 feet MSL or lower MORA
11. 4 20 4 4 3 VNAV from NAV 1 Page 4 20 4 5 Calculator Pages pedis aaa 4 21 4 5 1 The Calculator 1 CAL 1 Page 4 21 TOC 3 Table of Contents 4 5 2 The Calculator 2 CAL 2 Page 4 23 4 5 3 The Calculator 3 CAL 3 Page 4 25 4 5 4 The Calculator 4 CAL 4 Page 4 26 4 5 3 The Calculator 5 CAL 5 Page 4 27 4 5 6 The Calculator 6 CAL 6 Page 4 27 4 5 7 The Calculator 7 CAL 7 Page 4 28 4 5 8 The Calculator 8 CAL 8 4 29 4 6 Creating User defined Waypoints 4 30 4 6 1 Creating a Waypoint at Your Present Position 4 31 4 6 2 Creating a Waypoint at a Certain Latitude FOIIGIH OCS a 4 32 4 6 3 Creating a Waypoint Referenced from Another Waypoint erc 4 33 4 7 Navigation Modes 4 35 4 7 1 Selecting the Leg Mode or the OBS mode 4 35 4 7 2 The Leg Mode 4 35 4 73 TNE OBS MOGE nido etis and 4 36 4 7 4 Switching From the Leg Mode to the OBS Mode 4 38 4 7 5 Effects of Switching From OBS Mode to Leg ModE qe MEER 4 38 4 7 6 Going Direct to a Waypoint While in the OBS MOGG
12. APT VOR NDB INT USR FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 4 34 To utilize the turn anticipation feature start the turn transition to the next leg in the flight plan at the very beginning of turn anticipation This occurs when the external waypoint alert annunciator stops flashing and goes on steady At this time the KLN 89 B will notify you with a message on the Message page of the new desired track to select on your HSI or CDI Adj Nav Crs to 123 A message will not be given if the change in desired track course change is less than 5 The desired track DTK displayed on the NAV 1 page and optionally on the NAV 4 page also changes to the value for the next leg at the begin ning of turn anticipation Turn anticipation becomes inactive when transition to the next leg has been made APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 4 36 If desired turn anticipation may be disabled or enabled on the Setup SET 4 page by pressing the button and then rotating the right inner Knob to change back and between ENABLED figure 4 36 and Figure 4 37 DISABLED figure 4 37 If turn anticipation is disabled navigation is provided all the way to the way point and waypoint alerting occurs approximately 36 seconds prior to actually reaching the waypoint Z i 4 10 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Advanced GPS Operation 4 2 3 VIEWING THE WAYPOINT PAGES FOR THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLA
13. Advanced GPS Operation When the active waypoint is a VOR and the AUTO magnetic variation mode is active see section 4 10 the published mag netic variation for the VOR is utilized rather than the calculated magnetic variation so that the KLN 89 B indication will be identi cal to a NAV receiver indication 4 7 4 SWITCHING FROM THE LEG MODE TO THE OBS MODE The following mode transition occurs if the KLN 89 B is in the Leg mode and the mode is changed to the OBS mode 1 The waypoint that was active in Leg mode prior to the mode change remains the active waypoint in OBS mode The selected course is defined by two different methods depend ing on the installation and the status of the unit i If the KLN 89 B is the displayed navigation source when the change is made to OBS mode then the selected course becomes whatever was set on the external indicator prior to changing to the OBS mode This value should normally be the desired track to the active waypoint if you had the external indica tor set to the correct value prior to switching to the OBS mode ll If the KLN 89 B is not displayed on the external indicator then the selected course is chosen such that the deviation from the selected course remains the same If the OBS value chosen by default from rule 2 above is unac ceptable you can always define the desired course by the methods described in section 4 7 3 4 7 5 EFFECTS OF SWITCHING FROM OBS MODE TO LEG
14. eo ta 3 17 Change course modes 4 35 Change or delete an entire SID or STAR procedure from TAG ACTIV STING ONAN MR DC 5 33 Change the baro setting 3 58 Change the CDI scale factor 4 40 Change the default first waypoint character 3 15 Change the NAV 2 page present position reference waypoint 3 39 Change the present fuel on board 4 43 Change the selected course in OBS mode 4 37 iv KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Introduction TO SEE PAGE Greate a Mont DIAN Ia usu m 4 2 Create a user defined waypoint at your present position 4 31 Create a user defined waypoint using the radial distance method 4 33 Create a user defined waypoint with latitude longitude 4 32 Cycle between distance and desired track display on a numbered flight plan page 4 4 Cycle between distance ETE ETA and desired track on the PPS Oi A emer TR 4 13 Delete a flight plan which is no longer required 4 7 Delete a user defined waypoint from the OTH 4 page 3 65 Delete a waypoint from a flight plan
15. 6 Press to bring up the Direct To page Use the right inner and outer knobs to enter the identifier of Mueller Municipal airport 3 71 e D T Lom ad uoleiadg 49 215 9 gt gt 5 5 2 gt co Basic GPS Operation KAUS by using the right inner knob to select the characters and the right outer Knob to move the flashing part of the cursor to the desired cursor location Press Lest The APT 1 page for Mueller Municipal is now dis played on the screen Press again to approve the waypoint page The NAV 1 page is now displayed The NAV 1 page indicates it is 384 nautical miles to Austin and that the bearing is 225 degrees After take off the NAV 1 page will also display groundspeed and estimated time en route 3 18 2 EN ROUTE 1 We depart from runway 36 at Little Rock and are told to maintain runway heading After several radar vectors for traffic avoidance we are finally cleared on course The D Bar indicates that the radar vectors have taken us north of the original course and we decide to proceed Direct To Austin from our present position To recenter the D Bar press and then press t In order to determine the minimum enroute safe altitude ESA for our flight you view the ALT 1 page by pressing the button It indicates an ESA of 4300 feet for the trip and a minimum safe altitude for our present position of 3400 feet
16. C D T Lom ad 00121900 49 218 9 x gt 5 5 A gt co Basic GPS Operation e The specific GPS satellites or space vehicles SV being received are displayed in the left column Each satellite has its own identification number symbol to the right of the satellite number indicates this particular satellite is not presently being tracked by the receiver NOTE At some times you may desire to deselect certain satellites if you know them to be inaccurate so that they are not used to deter mine the GPS position Should a satellite be inaccurate it could cause a RAIM failure rendering the system unusable for primary IFR navigation To deselect a specific satellite turn on the cursor amp and move it over the desired SV number figure 3 187 Turn the right inner knob to deselect or reselect the desired satellite e satellite s health is indicated to the right of the satellite number The health of the satellite can be described as Gd for Good Wk for Weak and Bd for Bad Ds indicates the satellite was deselected by the pilot Fd indicates the receiver detected a fault and excluded that satellite e signal strength Sg for each satellite is displayed next and indicates the signal strength for each satellite in the range of 0 zero to 9 nine The higher the value the stronger the signal e The eleva
17. When the alarm goes off the KLN89 B will display the message page message Timer expired 4 5 4 THE CALCULATOR 4 CAL 4 PAGE The CAL 4 page is used to determine pressure altitude To calculate the pressure altitude 1 2 Turn on the cursor Enter the altitude indicated on the aircraft s altimeter Ind to the nearest hundred feet or ten meters by using the right inner knob to c the desired value figure 4 Figure 4 85 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV CAL SET Use the right outer knob to move the cursor to the Baro field and then use the right inner knob to e enter the current altimeter setting figure 4 86 The pressure altitude APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET Prs is now displayed Figure 4 86 NOTE The altimeter baro set units may be changed between inches millibars and hectopascals on the SET 8 page see section 3 3 4 26 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Advanced GPS Operation 4 5 5 THE CALCULATOR 5 CAL 5 PAGE The CAL 5 page is used to determine density altitude To calculate the density altitude 1 Turn on the cursor 2 he pressure altitude Prs displayed will be either the last entered pressure altitude on this page or the last calculated pressure altitude from the CAL 4 page If you desire to change it enter the current pressure alti tude to the nearest hundred feet or ten meters by using the right APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET inner knob figu
18. CLB Class B airspace CLC Class C airspace CTA Control area TMA Terminal area TRSA Terminal radar service area Line 2 The airport s time difference from UTC during standard time and during daylight time in parentheses Line 3 Fuel types available at the airport This line will be blank if there is no fuel available at the airport 60 80 octane 100 100 octane 100L 100 octane low lead JET Jet fuel of any type AUTO Automotive fuel also known as MOGAS Line 4 Approach type s available at the airport If an airport has an ILS approach and or an MLS approach no indication of non preci sion approach availability will be given NO APR No FR approach NP APR approach es only ILS ILS approach MLS MLS approach ILS MLS ILS and MLS approaches 3 47 e D T Lom ad 00121900 49 218 9 tS co x s e OS 2 gt co Basic GPS Operation If the airport has a GPS non precision approach included in the KLN 89B data base GPS will also be displayed on line 4 The lower right corner will display R if the airport has an approach departure radar environment 3 11 1 4 The Airport 4 APT 4 Page See figure 3 142 The APT 4 page displays the runway designation length surface and light ing for up to five runways in order of length beginning with the longest run Figure 3 142 way Since there are many times w
19. MODE The following mode transition occurs if the KLN 89 B is in the OBS mode with a TO indication and the mode is switched to the Leg mode 1 The waypoint that was active while in the OBS mode remains the active waypoint when the Leg mode is activated The system does not attempt to orient itself on a leg of the active flight plan unless the TO FROM indicator is indicating FROM In the FROM case the KLN 89 B will reorient on the active flight plan The selected course Obs that was active in the OBS mode prior to switching to Leg mode becomes the desired track Dtk in 4 38 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Advanced GPS Operation the Leg mode unless the mode change was made on the from side in which case the KLN 89 B will calculate the correct desired track for the new leg 3 With the exception of 2 above the characteristics of normal Direct To operation apply 4 If the active waypoint was part of the active flight plan FPL 0 the system will revert to normal flight plan operation once the active waypoint is reached 4 7 6 GOING DIRECT TO A WAYPOINT WHILE IN THE OBS MODE The direct to function will select the OBS value that will take the air craft from the present position direct to the active waypoint when the KLN 89 B is not the displayed navigation source on the external indi cator If the KLN 89 B is the displayed navigation source on an HSI or CDI it is not possible for the KLN 89 B to change
20. 3 36 3 10 1 The Navigation 1 NAV 1 Page 3 36 3 10 2 The Navigation 2 NAV 2 Page 3 39 3 10 3 The Navigation NAV Page 3 40 3 10 4 The Navigation 4 NAV 4 Page 3 40 WayDOIDU u u aa kau od lius 3 45 Alrport Pages uu u u ter hls Suerte e rns 3 45 3 11 1 1 The Airport 1 APT 1 Page 3 45 3 11 1 2 The Airport 2 APT 2 Page 3 46 3 11 1 3 The Airport APT 3 Page 3 47 3 11 1 4 The Airport 4 APT 4 Page 3 48 3 11 1 5 The Airport 5 APT 5 Page 3 49 3 11 1 6 The Airport 6 APT 6 Page 3 50 3 11 1 7 The Airport 7 APT 7 Page 3 51 3 11 1 8 The Airport 8 APT 8 Page 3 52 9 T2 VOR Paes u a nu i suae chri vv aba eae 3 53 3 11 2 1 The VOR 1 Page 3 53 3 11 2 2 The VOR 2 Page 3 53 S Flo NDBPAdOS uy tu Ero iba dT y us 3 54 3 11 3 1 The NDB 1 3 54 3 11 3 2 The NDB 2 3 54 3 11 4 Intersection Pages 3 55 3 11 4 1 The Intersection 1 INT 1 Page 3 55 3 11 4 2 The Intersection 2 INT 2 Page 3 55 3 11 5 U
21. KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Appendix ARTCC ABBREVIATIONS Cont d MIN MINNEAPOLIS MIR MIRNY MLM MALMO MLT MALTA MNC MONCTON NORTHERN MNC MONCTON SOUTHERN MNS MANAUS MNT MONTERREY MOG MOGADISHU MON MONTREAL MOS MOSCOW MRM MURMANSK MS MYS SHMIDTA MSK MINSK MTV MONTEVIDEO MUM MUMBAI MUN MUNICH MUR MUREN MUS MUSCAT NAD NADI OCEANIC NAH NAHA NAI NAIROBI NAS NASSAU NDJ N DJAMENA NIC NICOSIA NIK NIKOLAEVSK NA AMURE NMY NIAMEY NORILSK EE NOV NOVOSIBIRSK 22 NUK NUKUS zu NY NEW YORK NY NEW YORK OCEANIC NZE NEW ZEALAND OAK OAKLAND OAK OAKLAND OCEANIC ODE ODESSA OKH OKHA OMS OMSK ORN ORENBURG OSK OKHOTSK OSL OSLO D 13 Appendix ARTCC ABBREVIATIONS Contd PA PUNTA ARENAS PAN PANAMA OCEANIC PAP PORT AU PRINCE PAR PARIS PE PORT ELIZABETH PEC PECHORA PEM PERM PEN PENZA PER PERTH PET PETERSBURG PEV PEVEK PHN PHNOM PENH PIA PIARCO PM PORT MORESBY PMT PUERTO MONTT PRA PRAGUE PRM PARAMARIBO UTA PTR PETROPAVLOVSK KAM PV PORTO VELHO PYO PYONGYANG REC RECIFE RES RESISTENCIA REY REYKJAVIK RIG RIGA RIV RIVADAVIA RMS REIMS ROB ROBERTS ga ROC ROCHAMBEAU z ROM ROME Eu ROS ROSTOV lt ROV ROVANIEMI SAI SAINSHAND SAL SAL OCEANIC SAM SAMARA SAN SANTIAGO SAR SARAJEVO SCO SCOTTISH SDO SANTO DOMINGO SEA SEATTLE SEM SEMIPALATINSK SEY SEYCHELLES D 14 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Appendix ARTCC ABBREVIATIONS Cont d SHA SHANGHAI SHE S
22. VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL 3 Spell out the rest of the identifier using the right inner and outer Figure 4 100 knobs figure 4 100 4 Press Let The USR 1 page for your new waypoint will be displayed with its latitude and lon gitude figure 4 101 The cursor is turned off automatically VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL Figure 4 101 4 31 Chapter 4 A e N ou C e ca lt 4 Move the cursor down to the Advanced GPS Operation NOTE Another way to create a user defined waypoint at your present position is to select the USR pages spell out the identifier letter by letter see next section and then select the APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Present Pos option figure 4 102 Figure 4 102 and press LENT 4 6 2 CREATING A WAYPOINT AT A CERTAIN LATITUDE LONGITUDE It is also possible to create a user defined waypoint by manually entering a latitude and longitude Let s say you wanted to create a user waypoint over your hypothetical farm at N 42 56 32 W 76 29 95 To create a user defined waypoint with latitude longitude 1 From any user waypoint USR page turn on the cursor lersr It will flash over the first character in the waypoint identifier field figure 4 103 2 Use the right inner knob to select the first character of the identifier figure 4 104 Remember that when the cursor is on the right inner knob changes t
23. name and type of special use airspace altitude boundaries responsible ATC facility Inside Special Use Airspace This message appears when the aircraft is inside special use airspace SUA See sec tion 3 17 Internal Battery Low Service Required to Prevent Data Loss This message appears when the KLN 89 B s inter nal battery is low and needs replacing at an authorized Honeywell service center The battery should be replaced within a week to prevent the loss of all user defined data including waypoint airport remarks flight plans etc Typical battery life is approximately three to five years Low Bus Voltage Check Charging System This message appears when the voltage on the aircraft power bus drops below the alert voltage for longer than the alert delay time Both the alert voltage and alert delay time are displayed on the SET 10 page and set at the time of KLN 89 B installation In addi tion the SET 10 page displays the present power bus voltage This message may be indicative of a problem with the aircrafts charging sys tem Consult your aircraft s Pilot Operating Handbook to troubleshoot the problem You may desire to turn off some of the aircraft s electrical devices which are non essential for your particular phase s of flight so that the battery will not discharge as quickly B 3 g xipuaddy cD e N c g cD cD e N 9 e cD o Appendix B o a c 7 0
24. uses SE NW Point uses PT Port uses PT Fort uses FT Saint uses ST General Deleted or uses GEN Person s name uses initials for other than last name unless very well known Will Rogers World airport Delete City of City of Colorado Springs Municipal Delete Greater Greater Buffalo Int l Delete The The Hartsfield Atlanta Int l 2 Unless the first word is greater than eight characters it is usually not abbreviated Delete most punctuation such as periods and apostrophes 4 Abbreviations for International are INTL INT and IN 5 Abbreviations for Regional are REGL and REG 3 8 NEAREST FUNCTIONS At any time you can have access to the nearest airports waypoints Special Use Airspace SUA Flight Service Station FSS frequen cies and Center frequencies to your position Your ticket to do this is the handy button When you first press the button a page is displayed asking which nearest function you would like to select figure 3 88 The choices are APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 3 88 3 26 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation APT Airports VOR VORs NDB NDBs INT Intersections USR User defined waypoints SUA Special Use Airspaces FSS Flight Service Station Frequencies CTR Center Frequencies To select the desired nearest function use the right inner knob to move the cursor to the desired selection and press t Notice that
25. Added statements explaining the double dagger symbol to pages B 1 and C 1 Added more description to APT CAL NAV OTH and SET page listings in the index R 2 Revision History and Instructions Manual KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Revision 3 March 1997 Part Number 006 08786 0000 This revision corrects a typographic error on page 4 47 R 3 R 4 This page intentionally left blank KLNS9 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Table of Contents INTRODUCTION icta i KLN 89 B SNEAK PREVIEW ii HOWSTOUINDEX SOS a ukyu e iv 1 KLN 89 B SYSTEM COMPONENTS 1 1 2 DATA BASE Q aS 2 1 2 1 Data 2 1 2 2 Data Base Contents and Coverage Areas 2 1 2 3I AQ Identliers uccide oc EH Eu ants 2 4 2 4 Updating the Data Base 2 4 2 4 1 Computer Updating of the Data Base 2 5 2 4 2 Card Exchange Updating of the Data Base 2 8 2 5 User Defined Data Base 2 8 2 6 Data Base Update Service Options 2 9 3 BASIC GPS OPERATION 3 1 3 T Coverage Aled inr eee 3 1 3 2 TUMON and Sell Lestpux us 3 1 3 9 DISDIAY Formal Cheeses qud 3
26. Figure 3 137 and Figure 3 137 3 45 e D T Lom ad 00121900 49 218 9 EE N 4 A ca oD eet a Be lt basic GPS Operation PRIVATE if it is a private use airport If the airport is being viewed as part of the nearest airports list see section 3 8 1 Viewing the Nearest Waypoints the APT 1 page format Figure 3 138 will differ as follows see figure 3 138 Line 1 After the airport identifier the number designating the air port s position in the nearest airport list is displayed In figure 3 138 KLIT is the third nearest airport Line 2 Same as a normal APT 1 page Line 3 The length surface and lighting of the longest runway Line 4 The magnetic bearing to or the magnetic radial from the airport and the distance Placing the cursor over the radial bearing field and pressing toggles between radial from and bearing to the airport 3 11 1 2 The Airport 2 APT 2 Page See figure 3 139 Line 1 The ICAO identifier see Figure 3 139 section 2 3 of the airport an arrow precedes the identifier if it is the active waypoint APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Lines 2 3 The latitude and longitude of the airport reference point the official location of the airport Line 4 The magnetic bearing to or the magnetic radial from the air port and the distance Placing the cursor over th
27. I gt SID Review these waypoints f APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET desired If the waypoints look cor Figure 5 36 rect then press with the cursor over ADD TO FPL 0 to load the SID into the active flight plan figure 5 36 T The KLN 89B Will then add the APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET SID procedure after the airport Figure 5 37 reference point in the active flight plan figure 5 37 If the airport reference point is not included in the active flight plan then the KLN 89B will ask to add this way point to the active flight plan Section 5 2 4 gives the actions required to fly this SID 5 2 2 SELECTING A STAR The steps required to select a STAR are very similar to those required to select a SID The only difference is the order of the steps to define the STAR and where the STAR is loaded into the flight plan The steps required to define Acton Four arrival with the Wink transi tion serve as an example of how to select a STAR This STAR is to the Dallas Fort Worth International airport KDFW To select a STAR 1 Select KDFW on one of the airport pages figure 5 38 If you are operating from an active flight APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH plan you can use the ACT 7 page Figure 5 38 for KDFW by scanning through the active flight plan see section 4 2 3 2 to the APT 7 page for KDFW Make sure that STAR is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen G 1940209
28. Ireland Iran D 4 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Appendix COUNTRY ABBREVIATIONS Cont d IRQ Iraq ISL Iceland ISR Israel ITA Italy JAM Jamaica JOR Jordan JPN Japan Okinawa JTN Johnston Island KEN Kenya KHM Cambodia Kampuchea KIR Kiribati Tuvalu Phoenix I Line I KNA St Kitts Nevis KOR Korea KWT Kuwait LAO Laos LAT Latvia LBN Lebanon LBR Liberia LBY Libya SPA Jamahiriya LCA St Lucia LKA Sri Lanka LSO Lesotho LUX Luxembourg MAC Macau MAR Morocco MCD Macedonia MDG Madagascar Comoros Mayotte l Reunion MDV Maldives P MEL Melilla S MEX Mexico E MHL Marshall Island MID Midway Island MLI Mali MLT Malta MNP Mariana Islands MOL Moldova MOZ Mozambique MRT Mauritania MSR Monserrat Isl MUS Mauritius MWI Malawi D 5 sa uS S a sb o n 22 Appendix COUNTRY ABBREVIATIONS Cont d MYR MYS NAM NCL NER NGA NIC NIU NLD NOR NPL NRU NZL OMN PAC PAK PAN PCI PER PHL PNG POL PRI PRK PRT PRY PYF QAT ROM RWA SAU SDN SEN SGP SHN SLB SLE SLO SLV SOM Myanmar Malaysia Namibia New Caledonia Niger Nigeria Nicaragua Niue Island Netherlands Norway Nepal Naura New Zealand Oman Oakland OTCA PACIFIC Pakistan Panama Caroline Island Micronesia Peru Philippines Papua New Guinea Poland Puerto Rico Korea Dem Peoples Republic Portugal Azores Madeira Isl Paraguay French Polynesia Society Isl
29. Repeat step 5 for the ones digit of the year field 7 Press to start the KLN 89 B using the newly entered date VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET figure 3 177 Figure 3 176 To set the time on the SET 2 page 1 Select the SET 2 page if it is not already selected S VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL 2 Turn on the cursor and move it to the time zone field figure 3 178 Figure 3 177 3 Change the time zone with the right inner knob if desired figure 3 179 A listing of the time zones and their abbreviations is con VERTENTE RETURNS tained in section 3 2 Turn on and _ Self Test Figure 3 178 4 Move the cursor to the time field The hours and minutes will appear in inverse video 5 Select the correct hour figure I 3 180 Remember the KLN 89 B uses 24 hour time If it is 1 00 P M or later add 12 hours for example 2 30 P M becomes 2283 14 30 6 Move the flashing part of the Figure 3 180 cursor to the tens of minutes select the proper number figure 3 181 then move on to the last digit and set it T Press to start the clock VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET running figure 3 182 Note that Figure 3 181 the seconds reset to zero when you do this NOTE The above format for the SET2 page applies lo ORS 02 soft APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL ware ORS 01 software has a different page layout however the same steps followed to set the date or t
30. Tuamotu Qatar Romania Rwanda Saudi Arabia Sudan Senegal Singapore Ascension Island St Helena Solomon Islands Sierra Leone Slovenia El Salvador Somalia D 6 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Appendix COUNTRY ABBREVIATIONS Cont d SPM St Pierre Miquelon STP Sao Tome Principe SUR Suriname SVK Slovakia SWE Sweden SWZ Swaziland SYC Seychelles SYR Syria TCA Turks and Caicos Islands TCD Chad TGO Togo THA Thailand TTO Trinidad Tabago TUN Tunisia TUR Turkey TWN Taiwan TZA Tanzania UGA Uganda URY Uruguay USA United States of America VCT St Vincent VEN Venezuela VGB Virgin Islands U K VIR Virgin Islands U S VNM Vietnam VUT Vanautu WAK Wake Island WLF Wallis Futuna Islands XJ1 Kazakhstan Kyrgyzstan XJ2 Armenia Georgia E XJ3 Ukraine Moldova Ei XJ4 Estonia Russia XJ5 Belarus Latvia Lithuania Russia XJ6 Kazakhstan Russia XJ7 Kazakhstan Tajikistan Turkmenistan Uzbekistan XJJ Azerbaijan XJR Russia YEM Yemen Arab Republic YUG Yugoslavia D 7 sa es a gt o c a2 Appendix ZAF South Africa ZAM Zambia ZAR Zaire ZWE Zimbabwe ARTCC ABBREVIATIONS ABBREVIATION ARTCC ABQ ALBUQUERQUE ACC ACCRA ADD ADDIS ABABA ADE ADELAIDE ADN ADEN AKM AKMOLA AKT AKTYUBINSK ALG ALGIERS ALM ALMATY AMD AMDERMA AMM AMMAN AMS AMSTERDAM ANA ANADYR ANC ANCHORAGE ARCTIC ANC ANCHORAGE ANC ANCHORAGE OCEANIC ANK ANKARA ANT ANTANANARIVO ARK ARKHANGELSK ASH ASH
31. co U N T 9 e The third method of creating a user defined waypoint is as a radial and distance from a known waypoint To create a user defined waypoint using the radial distance method 1 From any user waypoint USR page turn on the cursor css It will flash over the first character in the waypoint identifier field 2 Use the right inner knob to select the first character of the identifier Remember that when the cursor is on the right inner 4 33 Advanced GPS Operation knob changes the character and the right outer knob moves the cursor around 3 Spell out the rest of the identifier INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL using the right inner and outer Fiaure 4 112 knobs figure 4 112 9 4 Move the cursor down to the third line over User Pos R D figure 4 113 5 Press mr The display will Figure 4 113 change to a format like figure 4 114 with the cursor over the reference waypoint field 6 Use the right inner and outer knobs to select the identifier of Oo TEE ESI TRUE the desired reference waypoint Figure 4 114 figure 4 115 7 Press Let The waypoint page for the waypoint you just entered will be displayed figure 4 116 8 Press again to approve the Figure 4 115 waypoint You will be returned to the waypoint creation page 9 Use the right inner and outer 325 knobs to select the desired radial Notice that you may enter the VOR NDB INT USR AC
32. desired track Dtk The desired track is displayed on the NAV 1 and may be selected for display on the NAV 4 page To fly a great circle course between two points the desired track may be constantly changing A good way to illustrate this concept is with a world globe and a piece of string You can determine the great circle path between Denver Colorado and Manila Philippines by stretching the string over the globe between these two points Notice that you would start the flight with a northwesterly desired track which gradually becomes due westerly and finally south westerly by the time you reach Manila Of course your trips with the KLN 89 B will be substantially shorter and the desired track will probably change only a few degrees Automatic waypoint sequencing is provided during flight plan operation As you reach a waypoint in your flight plan the next leg of the flight plan automatically becomes active There are some situations during approach operations in which automatic leg sequencing is automatically disabled See Chapter 5 Turn anticipation may be utilized in flight plan operation as described in section 4 2 2 The Minimum Enroute Safe Altitude ESA displayed on the ALT 1 page is the highest MSA sector altitude from the present position to the destination waypoint along the active flight plan or Direct To route whichever is in use See section 3 12 4 7 3 THE OBS MODE The following are characteristics of the OBS m
33. figure 5 25 If it is desired to recompute the arc intercept point then press L amp T If a new arc intercept point is not desired then press again M e If Was pressed then the APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV rmm SET OTH 3 KLN 89B will calculate an arc Figure 5 25 intercept point based on the present track of the aircraft over the ground NOTE If the present track does not intercept the arc then the KLN 89B will display No Intcpt in the scratchpad area of the screen 8 When the aircraft approaches the arc the KLN 89B will provide waypoint alerting and turn anticipation to join the arc Once established on the arc the KLN 89B provides left right guid ance relative to the curved arc Distance to the active waypoint is the distance from the present position to the active waypoint NOT the distance along the arc Refer to Appendix A for the geometry of the arc During the arc the desired track will be constantly changing To help you keep the orientation correct the NAV 4 page will auto matically display DTK on the fourth line It is not possible to change this to something else while on the arc The value dis played for the desired track will flash when the difference between the CDI or HSI and the current desired track is greater than 10 Some DME arcs have defined radials that serve as step down fixes These points are not stored in the data base To help you determine your position relative to these step down
34. use Cross check the position of the aircraft with other means of naviga tion every 15 minutes to verify that the position is still accurate Check APR ACTV Annunciator This message appears when an overcurrent condition is detected on the ACTV annunciator output It is usually indicative of a fail ure of the wiring between the KLN 89B and the ACTV annunciator Have the installation checked to determine the problem Check APR ARM Annunciator This message appears when an overcurrent condition is detected on the ARM annunciator output It is usually indicative of a fail ure of the wiring between the KLN 89B and the ARM annunciator Have the installation checked to determine the problem Check MSG Annunciator This message appears when an overcurrent condition is detected on the MSG annunciator output It is usually indica tive of a failure of the wiring between the KLN 89 B and the MSG annunciator Have the installation checked to determine the problem Check Real Time Clock This message appears when a possible fault is detected with the KLN 89 B s internal real time clock This condition does not require immediate service Manually initialize the time on the Initialization Page to minimize the time to first fix see section 3 6 Check WPT Annunciator This message appears when an overcurrent condition is detected on the WPT annunciator output It is usually indica tive of a failure of the wiring between the KLN 89 B an
35. 145 Lines 2 4 The pilot entered remarks for the airport Three lines of 14 characters each are available for the remarks These remarks might include information on lodging dining airport services etc Up to 100 waypoints may include remarks Letters numbers hyphens and spaces may be used in the remark If no remarks have been entered for the airport line 2 will display Remarks 3 50 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation To enter an airport remark on the APT 6 page 1 Turn on the cursor and move it until the cursor fills line 2 of the screen figure 3 146 2 With the right inner knob select VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL the desired character if any and Figure 3 146 move the cursor to the next char acter on the line figure 3 147 Repeat step 2 as necessary 2 4 to approve each line VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL of remarks The cursor will auto Figure 3 147 matically move to the next line see figure 3 148 5 Turn the cursor off when you are finished creating the remark fig ure 3 149 VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL The Other 5 OTH 5 page is a list of CONG SIME waypoints with associated remarks Sometimes these are deleted if there are more than 100 waypoints with remarks or if the remarks are no longer relevant If you wish to delete a waypoint remark for an airport see Figure 3 149 section 3 14 2 t3 11 1 7 The Airport 7 APT 7 Page KLN 89B only
36. 16 minutes after departure via the SFO R 090 to intercept the OAK R 135 POINT REYES x OAKLAND Aur P 181168 oak N38 04 8 W122 521 N37 43 6 W122 13 4 B D6 SFO N37 40 0 W122 29 0 15 A 090 hag ax N37 16 1 W122 19 7 At or above 13000 At or above FL 200 or at assigned lower Rwys I9L R altitude flight level departures tucn LEFT as soon as practicable due to steeply rising terrain to 2000 immediately south of airport MOT ED CHANGES Departure number rwys lOL R amp 19L R take off PORTE NINE DEPARTURE PORTE9 WAGES PILOT NAV MT SAN BRUNO WEATHER INFORMATION AVAILABLE ON 118 05 RADAR REQUIRED FOR RWYS 1 L R DEPARTURES DME REQUIRED at or above 5000 Rwys 10L R and 19L R Turn LEFT and climb Avenal PORTE9 AVE From Wages Int to Clovis PORTES CZQ From Wages Int to Fellows PORTE9 FLW From Wages Int to Panoche PORTE9 PXN From Wages Int to Rudi ee 15 8 SFO Direct distance from PORTE Inti N37 37 2 W122 22 4 San Francisco Intl W122 28 5 NC 33 3 W122 06 6 Int of SFO R 090 and At or above EN AY er abcve OAK R 135 13 NM 9000 5 5000 I WOODSIDE I T B 13 9 OSI t a N37 21 4 W121 587 ec i ES repays me N37 23 5 W122 16 Z X or above x W ON Z Z 9000 112 9 CZQ N36 42 4 W121 22 2 At or above FL 240 or at assigned lower aititude tlight level N36 44 4 W121 28 4 A1 above F
37. 2 2 7 Press to acknowledge the estimated load time and begin the erasing of the existing data base The unit will now display Erasing data base After the data base has been erased the loading of the new data automati cally begins As the new data is Figure 2 5 being loaded the percentage of transfer is displayed figure 2 5 8 The KLN 89 B will indicate when the data base update is complete as shown in figure 2 6 You may VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET either turn the KLN 89 B off at Figure 2 6 this point or press to restart d the KLN 89 B 9 Remove the interface cable Remove the disk from the computer Turn off the computer VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL The chances are small of having difficulty updating the data base but If you have a problem e First check that the interface cable is properly connected and that the computer is turned on If there is a problem with the connec 2 7 Data Base tion or the computer the KLN 89 B will display Data Loader Not Ready When the problem is corrected this prompt is removed and the update operation can continue from where it left off e Ifan internal test fails after the data has been loaded the KLN 89 B will display Checksum Error Data Base Invalid Press to acknowledge The KLN 89 B will then display Data Base Update Failed Retry Use the right outer knob to position the cursor over the desired choice and press Lev e
38. 306 Cross FLW R 306 126 DME fix at or above FL 240 or at assigned LOWER altitude flight level PXN VOR Via PXN R 273 SAN FRANCISCO N36 53 0 W9 48 9 PANOCHE 112 6 PXN N35 38 8 Wiig 58 7 1988 1993 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED f e JEPPESEN SANDERSON INC Reproduced with permission of Jeppesen Sanderson Inc Reduced for illustrative purposes Figure 5 43 2 35 G Jaydey e 9 e cD o 9 2 e gt c gt JJ Approaches and SID STARs 6 Before reaching PORTE change back to the Leg mode to enable automatic waypoint sequencing Once the aircraft reaches PORTE the KLN 89B will automatically sequence to the next way point PESCA 7 After passing PESCA the procedure calls for a 090 heading until intercepting the 116 course to WAGES intersection To do this with the KLN 89B change back to the OBS mode and make sure that WAGES is the active waypoint Set the selected course to 116 8 Before reaching WAGES change to the Leg mode This will allow automatic waypoint sequencing upon reaching WAGES 9 There is an altitude restriction marked with an x on the chart The name of this point is 26FLW 26FLW means that the waypoint is 126 NM from the FLW VOR DME Make sure to meet any alti tude requirements upon reaching this waypoint 10 Once the aircraft reaches FLW proceed on with the
39. 49 218 9 d N 0 ca c s a lt Basic GPS Operation 5 Use right outer and inner knobs as in the previous steps until the desired identifier is completely 3 reg displayed figure 3 104 6 Press to display the waypoint Figure 3 104 page for the selected waypoint figure 3 105 7 Press again to approve the displayed waypoint page The screen will change the NAV 1 077077 page and the selected waypoint Figure 3 105 will now be the active Direct To waypoint figure 3 106 NOTE some cases during approach operations the KLN 89B presents a page asking how a way APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH point is used when the waypoint Figure 3 106 identifier is entered character by char acter When this page is presented simply choose the desired use of the waypoint e g FAF or MAHP by moving the cursor with the right outer knob and pressing Choosing the correct use of the way point is required to ensure proper waypoint sequencing once the aircraft reaches the waypoint To fly Direct To a waypoint procedure 2 1 Select the desired waypoint page APT VOR NDB INT or SUP on the screen figure 3 107 using one of the three procedures explained in section 3 7 2 Press l The Direct To page is displayed and it contains the desired waypoint identifier APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET
40. 5 minutes it is a good idea to turn off all electrical equipment on the aircraft except for the KLN 89 B to avoid running down the aircraft battery NOTE The diskettes sent to you can only be used to update one KLN 89 B although they can update that specific unit numerous times The first time the diskettes are used in an update operation a unique identification code from the KLN 89 B being used is uploaded to the diskettes These diskettes may be used in this specific KLN 89 B an unlimited number of times which could be required if you switch back and forth between the Americas North Americas South Atlantic and Pacific data bases during one update cycle These diskettes may not however be used to update other KLN 89 B s This update protection ensures that Jeppesen Sanderson is properly compensated for the use of their NavData da e cS co c pm G Chapter 2 To update the KLN 89 B data base by computer 1 Plug the 9 pin female connector end of the interface cable into a COM serial port of the computer If the computer has COM 1 and COM 2 serial ports either may be used Some computers use a 9 pin COM serial port connector while other computers use a 25 pin connector If the computer being used has a 9 pin connector the interface cable connector will plug directly into the computer s 9 pin connector If the computers COM serial port uses a 25 pin connector use the 25 pin to 9 pin adapter included in the P
41. 8 3 4 Basic Operation of Panel Controls 3 11 3 4 1 Page Selection ns 3 12 34 2 Data Entry sistat uoto 3 13 3 4 3 The Duplicate Waypoint Page 3 15 3 44 Cycle Fields e e teens 3 17 3 5 Message Page uuu adsl uatrex dotes aaa n vM Ys 3 17 3 6 Initialization and Time to First Fix 3 18 3 7 Selecting and Scanning Waypoints 3 21 3 7 1 Selecting Waypoints by Identifier 3 21 3 7 3 Selecting Waypoints by Scanning 3 23 3 7 4 Selecting Waypoints by Name or City 3 24 3 64 Nearest FUNCIONS aote a uon tote e tees 3 26 3 8 1 Viewing the Nearest Waypoints 3 27 3 8 1 1 Nearest Airport Criteria 3 28 3 8 1 2 Continuous Display of Nearest Airport 3 29 3 8 2 Viewing the Nearest Special Use Airspaces 3 29 3 8 3 Viewing the Nearest Flight Service Station izle ec cR 3 31 3 8 4 Viewing the Nearest Center Frequencies 3 32 TOC 1 Table of Contents 3 9 Direct sinss y u t 3 32 2 9 1 nmang DIFeCE EO 3 33 3 9 2 Cancelling a Direct To 3 35 3 9 3 Waypoint Alerting for Direct To Operation 3 35 3 109 Navigation PAGES
42. 89B pages The definitions of these suffixes are i The Initial Approach Fix IAF of the approach f The Final Approach Fix FAF of the approach m The Missed Approach Point MAP of the approach h The Missed Approach Holding Point MAHP for the approach Every approach will have a FAF and a MAP Almost all will have an IAF and missed approach holding point Another item that you should notice in the flight plan is the line that has NO WPT SEQ on it figure 5 8 This is what is referred to as a fence and the purpose of this line is to tell you that APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 5 8 5 8 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Approaches and SID STARs the KLN 89B will not automatically sequence past the waypoint that precedes the fence The waypoint before the fence is always the missed approach point The reason that waypoint sequencing is not allowed is that many missed approach procedures require specific actions before going to the missed approach holding point e g climbing on a fixed heading until reaching an altitude 5 1 3 CHANGING OR DELETING AN APPROACH ONCE LOADED INTO THE FLIGHT PLAN The sequence of waypoints that are retrieved from the data base of the KLN 89B define the approach procedures as they are charted To ensure that the proper path over the ground is followed it is not possible to either delete or add waypoints to the approach section of the flight plan To help you see which
43. APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 3 2 You are now viewing the Figure 3 72 APT 1 page for KORD The KLN 89 B feature of filling in characters of the identifier can be a time saver For a second example let s select Bloomington VOR whose identifier is BMI More selecting a waypoint by identifier 1 Make sure you have turned the cursor off from the previous example With the right knobs select the VOR 1 page figure 3 73 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 2 Turn the cursor essR on co x gt oO e Og N gt co 3 Change the first character to a B figure 3 74 4 Move the cursor to the second APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH character and select M figure 3 75 Eureka When you entered the M the KLN 89 B searched its data base for the first VOR identifier beginning with the letters BM and found BMI Many times you will only have to enter two or three characters of Figure 3 75 the waypoint identifier and the KLN 89 B will furnish the rest 5 Turn off the cursor ensn APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 3 22 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation 3 7 3 SELECTING WAYPOINTS BY SCANNING You may also select waypoints by scanning through them This may be done with the cursor either on or off To select a waypoint by scanning with the cursor off 1 Select the page typ
44. BASIC OPERATION OF PANEL CONTROLS The KLN 89 B controls are very easy to use Most of the page selection and data entry is done with the knobs on the right side of the front panel and the cursor lesr button immediately above them There are seven buttons across the bottom mse Message Loss Altitude Nearest Direct To Clear and Enter e D T Lam ad 00121900 49 218 9 The cursor position is indicated by flashing underlined text on the screen Many pages allow you to add delete or change data on the screen by first pressing the button to turn the cursor function on and bring the cursor on the screen The right knobs are then used to enter or change data When the cur sor is on the screen the lower left corner of the screen will show APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET CRSR rather than the page name for that particular page figure 3 35 Rd The cursor is over PRESENT POSN In addition this Pilot s Guide uses white whiskers to depict flashing characters on the screen 3 11 gt gt 5 5 2 gt co Basic GPS Operation 3 4 1 PAGE SELECTION It is now time to learn to select a desired page NOTE The cursor function is not used in selecting pages and the button should not be pressed at this time If CRSR is annunciat ed in the lower left corner of the display press the button to turn the cursor f
45. Co 4000 ATO 38 20 1014 A a RR tener 660 BOWMAN 122 SS ae a i qA 2 Standiford y 6 SCUMY F 38 10 MISSED _ _ PCH FIX m 7 Of FOR A LOUISVILLE E r I 4 comme n AVIG nu 0 M 85 30 5 1 VO Son D2 2 2400 10NM 1240 c 694 546 1 8 APT 547 MISSED APPROACH Climbing LEFT turn to 2500 via 110 heading and outbound on HU VOR R 061 to SCUMY INT D16 0 IIU and hold STRAIGHT IN LANDING RWY 24 CIRCLE TO LAND E G moan 1000 4547 With D2 2 Without D2 2 moan 1240694 MDA HI MDAfmI With D2 2 Without D2 2 A Al ias 9560451891 1240 521 1 B 1 BEF Eo 2 Lm IEE MAP at VOR CHANGES Transition altitudes GPS overlay data added JEPPESEN SANDERSON INC 1987 1994 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Reproduced with permission of Jeppesen Sanderson Inc Reduced for illustrative purposes Figure 5 19 Zm Z x 1910207 gt e 9 e cD 9 2 e gt c gt JJ 5 19 Chapter 5 N er d o cO a e a a e p Approaches and SID STARs For this example assume that the aircraft is approaching KLOU from the Nabb VOR 1 After passing the Nabb VOR you are told to expect the VOR 24 approach at KLOU You load the approach u
46. It is designed to always be mounted on the top of the aircraft The KLN 89 B has analog outputs to drive the left right deviation bar of most mechanical CDIs and HSls In addition the NAV mode of the Bendix King KFC 150 KAP 150 KAP 150H KAP 100 KFC 200 KAP 200 KFC 250 KFC 275 KFC 300 and KFC 325 flight control systems may be coupled to the KLN 89 B Many other autopilots may also be coupled to the KLN 89 B Actual autopilot performance and capability when coupled to the KLN 89 B may vary significantly from one autopilot model to another Altitude may be provided to the KLN 89 B from an encoding altime ter or blind encoder Altitude is used as an aid in position determination when not enough satellites are in view All IFR installations require remote annunciators to be mounted in the aircraft panel in order to select and indicate the status of certain KLN 89 B functions En route and terminal IFR certifications require annunciators for message MSG and waypoint alert WPT Non precision approach certifications also require a switch annunciator to select and display when the approach mode is armed or active 1 1 C 9 T amd Lan uu s s N Ld C w E E sj 3 os EC L sd N gt o System Components Each KLN 89 B system includes a configuration module which is attached to the KLN 89 B mounting rack The module allows the KLN 89 B to
47. MAP leg and transition to the approach mode when 2 NM from the IAF FAF If however you are approaching from any other direction a course reversal is required and the OBS mode will need to be selected If the OBS mode is not selected before reaching TXO then the KLN 89B will automatically sequence to the missed approach point This is not desirable when performing a course reversal so the OBS mode must be selected before reaching TXO NOTE The KLN 89B will only remind you to select OBS mode if the IAF is the active waypoint Therefore if a course reversal is required make sure the IAF is the selected waypoint 5 15 13 dey9 gt 9 e cD 9 2 e gt ce m Chapter 5 N er d o cO a e a a e p Approaches and SID STARs If a course reversal is required then upon reaching TXO perform the appropriate holding pattern entry and set the inbound course on the external CDI or HSI In this example the inbound course is 241 At this point the KLN 89B works very similar to a con ventional VOR DME Once established on the inbound course of 241 switch back to the Leg mode When Leg mode is selected the FAF is automati cally made the active waypoint when the IAF and the FAF are at the same waypoint NOTE It is mandatory that the unit be in LEG mode with the FAF as the active waypoint before crossing the FAF
48. Mun 068 D4 0 LAX Z 1 3 NM FREBY 2 Yo fo MAP D7 5 LAX y Hawthorne DZ71AX Mw i MA25B A585 A578 a LOS ANGELES n 50 Long Beach 3 amp B 13 6 LAX p 2ampetrini Mun e s O Y ns LI Dum r k 118 30 f f 2 25 1 a A f T Dual VOR or DME required for Noele Int NOELE FREBY AN VOR a LAX D7 i LAX w 4 a LAX agog 289 1728997 1718997 520 TDzE258 101 irs TDZE 258 102 9 2 wa 1 3 5 7 5 126 MISSED APPROACH Climb to 2000 or below direct LAX VOR then climb to 2500 outbound via LAX VOR R 192 to INISH INT D12 0 LAX STRAIGHT IN LANDING RWY 25L R Rwy 25R Rwy 25L moa SAO 458 moam 620 5197 RAIL out ALS out With Noele Without Noele Rwy 251 MDA 540 4397 Rwy 25R moa 620 518 gt RR 50 21 RVR 24 2 RvR 40 or Ya 2d or V2 s wsom A O O eboo Gnd speed Kts 70 90 Too 120 mo 160 oz7zraxo l TT ys LEREBY to MAP 4 8 4 07 3 12 2 53 2 24 2 03 1 48 CHANGES ATIS trequency procedure ident C JEPPESEN SANDERSON INC 1984 1994 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Reproduced with permission of Jeppesen Sanderson Inc Reduced for illustrative purposes Figure 5 12 3 As you approach ELMOO the KLN 89B will provide waypoint alerting on the external annunciator as well as on the screen of the KLN 89B Once you
49. O OBS mode 4 36 In approach procedures 5 4 5 18 Off airport navaid 5 15 On airport navaid 5 20 Operating from active flight plan 4 8 ORS Operational Revision Status Cover 3 2 OTH 1 GPS status page 3 62 OTH 2 GPS satellites page 3 62 OTH 3 RAIM predition page 5 28 OTH 4 Viewing user waypoints page 3 65 OTH 5 Waypoints w remarks page 3 65 OTH 6 Software Revision page 3 66 OTH 7 fuel on board page 4 42 OTH 8 fuel reserves eff page 4 43 OTH 9 fuel flow page 4 44 OTH 10 fuel used page 4 44 OTH 11 TAS Mach page 4 45 OTH 12 Air Temp altitude page 4 46 Outer markers OM 3 55 P Page number on display 3 10 Page organization 3 10 Page selection 3 1 1 1 8 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Index PC interface kit 2 5 PC requirements for updating data base 2 5 Plus sign meaning 3 10 Prefixes for airport identifiers 2 4 Present position 3 8 3 39 Procedure turns 5 20 R Radial from a waypoint 3 38 3 39 RAIM receiver autonomous integrity monitoring 5 12 5 27 Prediction 5 28 Radar vectors 5 18 Receiver status 3 62 3 63 Hemarks Airport page 3 50 User waypoint page 3 57 Runway fix 5 7 Runway information 3 48 S Sample trip 3 71 Satellite status 3 62 Scanning waypoint names 3 23 Scratchpad messages 3 11 Screen organization 3 9 Selected course See OBS mode Selecting Approach 5 5 IAF 5 6 SID 5 30 STAR 5 32 Transition SID STAR 5 31 5 32 Waypoints 3 20 3 21 3 22 3 23 3 24 Self test 3 1 SET 1 i
50. OTH Figure 3 107 figure 3 108 lt gt 3 Press ENT The display Will revert APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH to the NAV 1 page with the Figure 3 108 selected waypoint as the Direct To waypoint 3 34 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation If you get off course and wish to recenter the left right deviation bar D Bar to proceed to the same waypoint use the following procedure To recenter the D Bar by going direct to the active waypoint 1 Select a non waypoint page NAV FPL CAL SET or OTH on the screen 2 Press The Direct To page is displayed on the left contain ing the active waypoint identifier 3 Press Let FNOTE If the KLN 89B is in the approach mode and this method is used to center the D bar when the missed approach point is the active waypoint then the approach mode will be cancelled and the KLN89B will revert to the approach arm mode 3 9 2 CANCELLING A DIRECT TO The primary reason for wanting to cancel Direct To operation is to return to flight plan operation which is described later in section 4 2 4 Combining Direct To and Flight Plan Operation To cancel Direct To operation 1 Press gt gt J 2 Press to blank out the way point identifier field figure 3 109 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Press Let Figure 3 109 3 9 3 WAYPOINT ALERTING FOR DIRECT TO OPERATION Approximately 36 seconds prior to reaching a Direct
51. Pilot s Guide Approaches and SID STARs Load approach into flight plan a CDI Scale Factor 5 0 nm Approach automatically arms when within 30 nm of the airport and an approach is loaded into the active flight plan CDI Scale Factor changing from 1 0nm to 0 3 nm 7 Approach Arm 4 CDI Scale Factor CDI Scale Factor 4 1 0 nm constant at 40 3 nm Fasanananuna Automatic Waypoint s sequencing stops en Transition to approach 3 FAF Final Approach Fix E MAP Missed Approach Point Bins ls ha cks OK E ARP Airport Reference Point grity EN IAF initial Approach Fix Aircraft heading MAHP Missed Approach Holding towards the FAF D z Point FAF or co located F IAF FAF is active P MAHP waypoint Figure 5 1 This corresponds to point A in figure 5 1 If the aircraft is greater than 30 NM from the airport then the CDI scale factor will remain at the default 5 NM full scale deflection 2 Transition to the approach arm mode This will occur auto matically when the aircraft is within 30 NM of the airport and there is an approach loaded into the flight plan position B in fig ure 5 1 The CDI scale factor will change to 1 0 NM over the next 30 seconds and the external annunciator will indicate ARM 3 Getestablished on the final approach course NoPT arrival route e Radar vectors requires OBS mode Procedure turn or holdi
52. The APT 7 page shows the SID and STAR procedures that are available for the selected airport If both SID and STAR procedures are available then there will be two APT 7 pages indicated by 7 figure 3 150 If Figure 3 150 there are no SID or STAR procedures in the data base then this page will be as shown in figure 3 151 e D T Lom ad CD Ln 1 VOR NDB INT USR NAV FPL uoljeiadg 49 218 9 APT VOR NDB INT USR FPL The details of this page are presented in section 5 2 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL Figure 3 151 d N e A ca c 5 s a Be lt basic GPS Operation t13 11 1 8 The Airport 8 APT 8 Page KLN 89B only See figure 3 152 The APT 8 page specifies the non precision IAPs Instrument Approach Procedures available for the airport Remember that the desired approach must be in the published data base in order to be used by KLN 89B If there APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH are no approaches for this airport in Figure 3 152 the data base then this page will be as shown in figure 3 153 To read more about selecting a non precision approach see section 5 1 1 Line 1 The ICAO identifier see sec APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH tion 2 3 of the airport an arrow Figure 3 153 precedes the identifier if it is the active waypoint Lines 2 4 Listing of the instrument a
53. There are other error messages that may be displayed If you have a problem that you can t resolve write down any error messages to aid your Honeywell Service Center in identifying the problem da e cS co c pm G Chapter 2 2 4 2 CARD EXCHANGE UPDATING OF THE DATA BASE Having the front loading data card makes KLN 89 B very easy to update the data base by exchanging cards Enclose the expired data base card in the mailer that the new card was sent to you in A return shipping label is included in the mailer Please affix this label to the outside of the mailer Also peel off the protective backing from the adhesive on the end flap of the mailer Press the flap against the adhesive to seal the container Please return the expired card promptly by mailing immediately at any mailbox No postage is required if mailed from within the U S Users will be billed for cards not returned and no additional cards will be sent until either the expired card or payment for the expired card is received 2 5 USER DEFINED DATA BASE In addition to the published data base of airports VORs NDBs and Intersections stored in the Jeppesen data base you may create up to 500 other user defined waypoints Section 4 6 Creating User defined waypoints describes this further The KLN 89 B contains an internal lithium battery that is used to keep alive the user defined data base as well as flight plans This battery has a typical l
54. This page intentionally left blank C 9 ET amd Lam k XU ETE TED RENTES ST Data Base 1 165 150 135 120 105 90 75 60 45 30 15 0 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180 Americas North Data Base Americas South Data Base coverage area coverage area SS Overlap in Americas North amp Americas SY South Data Base coverage areas Z 13 dey9 aseg eed Atlantic Data Base Pacific Data Base coverage area coverage area Overlap in Pacific amp Atlantic Data Base coverage areas Figure 2 1 KLN 89 B Data Base Geographical Region 2 0 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Data Base 2 DATA BASE 2 1 DATA BASICS The data base provides two primary functions First it makes pilot interface with the GPS sensor much easier Rather than having to manually look up and then enter the latitude and longitude for a spe cific waypoint it allows you to merely enter a simple waypoint identifier The data base automatically looks up and displays the lati tude and longitude associated with the identifier It should be obvious that the data base saves a lot of tedious latitude longitude entry and also greatly reduces the potential for data input mistakes The second function of the data base is that it serves as a ve
55. YOL BIA HOA YOL SXil NOIN3U an PGZ H VOL PUB L 0 H BIA HOA NOV 01 HOA ANI 90213 PNOY NNI XUA 180439GI88 O 8329981 amp 61 H NOY HOA NOY 01 TUI Seupa FNDV SYNO3 3SEUP3 82U8uL G52 H NOW PUE BQ H 19 BLA HOA NOV 01 HOA IHY WOI PNDV IGY SNOILISNYHL NOV NOLOY PNOY NOLDV iz 01 SWX3L SvTvO 335 SldW YSHIO 803 ILNI HLYOM 14 11Y Q LEE Z 1 TIN HOA 14 5 11 SVX3l HLYOM 14 SVT1VG Figure 5 44 O YW C gt c C m O Q gt B c as O C C V O C O O G C z c O X O O c lt Q YW C c Le O Q L d o O G C ing in is a If the aircraft you are fly ts To do this ing waypoin Turn to the FPL 0 page and delete the follow 2 d gt 8 c OX gg 2 Ox Rey Ha 2 gt W C 255 2 gt TES a 2 OS nos O 5 r lt O gt 2 5 37 Approaches and SID STARs 5 Press and then to delete a waypoint 6 Repe
56. alert feature 1 Select the SET 10 page figure 3 198 and turn on the cursor lersr 2 Turn the right inner knob tO 77 enable the alert feature The Figure 3 198 alert voltage and alert delay will be displayed on lines 2 and 3 figure 3 199 3 Turn off the cursor ensn 2 If the avionics bus voltage drops Figure 3 199 below the alert voltage for the speci fied delay time the message Low Bus Voltage Check Charging System will be displayed This message may be indicative of a problem with the aircraft s charging system Consult your aircraft s Pilot Operating 3 67 C D T Lom ad 00121900 49 218 9 N 9 ca oD eet s a lt basic GPS Operation Handbook to troubleshoot the problem You may desire to turn off some of the aircraft s electrical devices which are non essential for your particular phase s of flight so that the battery will not discharge as quickly Appropriate alert voltage and alert delays will vary from aircraft to air craft If your KLN 89 B is frequently giving you this alert message it may become a nuisance and you may desire to have your Honeywell Service Center adjust the voltage alert parameters 3 17 SPECIAL USE AIRSPACE ALERTING The KLN 89 B data base contains the location of areas of special use airspace SUA The types of SUA areas stored in the data base and the ab
57. be configured for the unique characteristics of your equipment installation Parameters that are set by the configuration module include Whether the KLN 89B may be used for IFR operations or not and if it may be used for non precision approach IFR operations KLN 89 may only be used for VFR navigation Whether or not the altitude alert function in enabled See section 4 3 Whether or not an external fuel management system is interfaced to the KLN 89 B See section 4 8 Whether or not an external air data computer is interfaced to the KLN 89 B See section 4 9 The conditions for the aircraft bus voltage alert to activate See section 3 16 The configuration information is stored both in the module and in the KLN 89 B internal memory If the KLN 89 B detects a difference between the configuration stored in the module and the configuration stored in the internal memory which should only occur following the exchange of KLN 89 or KLN 89B units the configuration information will automatically be updated to the configuration specified in the configuration module If an error is detected in the configuration data a warning page stating Configuration Mem Error will be displayed during the KLN 89 B start up sequence and the configuration memory will be set to arbitrary default values See an authorized Honeywell Service center to correct the configuration memory error 1 2 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide System Components
58. bearing to the active waypoint To radial from the active waypoint Fr or the VNAV sta tus which will either by Off Armed time until VNAV begins or the suggested VNAV altitude see section 4 4 By placing the cursor over this field and pressing the button you may toggle between the three options NOTE Due to great circle courses and magnetic variation differ ences between present position and the active waypoint the To bearing and From radial may not be exactly 180 different from each other when the system is in the Leg mode This condition is most likely to occur when long distances are involved and or you are operating in very northerly or southerly latitudes See figure 3 118 for an example depicting a case like this The aircraft is somewhere over Georgia and the active waypoint is KPHX The bearing to steer is S 269 and radial is 72 Generally you will want to use bearing not xL radial when long distances are involved S5 a 52 E Z N 269 Figure 3 118 Line 4 also displays the estimated time en route ETE from present position to active waypoint 3 38 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation 3 10 2 THE NAVIGATION 2 NAV 2 PAGE The NAV 2 pages in figures 3 119 and 3 120 display the aircraft s present position in one of two formats The first line is a cyclic field which allows you to toggle between formats When the NAV 2 page is Figure 3 119 first displayed it d
59. begin with the letter E or the letter L Especially when flying VFR you will mostly want to enter Direct To or Flight Plan waypoints which are airports The KLN 89 B has a great feature that will save you turns of the knob when you know that the first character will probably be a K E L or other letter that is commonly used in your part of the world You can set the default first waypoint identifier character on the SET 5 page To change the default first way point identifier character 1 Select the SET 5 page figure 3 47 and turn on the cursor a figure 3 48 Figure 3 47 2 Use the right inner knob to select the desired character figure 3 49 such as a K in the U S a C in Canada a P in Alaska an E or an L in Europe etc gt Z P N INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET Figure 3 48 3 Turn off the cursor To try it out proceed to the SET 1 page initial position Turn the cursor c558 ra on it will come on over the way INT USR NAV FPL CAL SET point field Try turning the right Figure 3 49 inner knob one click clockwise figure 3 50 There s the character you just selected on the SET 5 page INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL 3 4 3 THE DUPLICATE eaten WAYPOINT PAGE igure v There are some waypoints in the data base whose identifiers are not unique That is more than one waypoint has the same identifier When a waypoint identifier has been entered which is not unique to a single waypoint a Duplicate
60. being added Another way to think of this is to position the cursor over the location in the flight plan you wish the new waypoint to be added For example if SJl is presently the second waypoint in the flight plan and you wish to insert GPT in the number 2 position in front of SJl move the cursor over Sul figure 4 14 3 Use the inner knob to enter the first character of the waypoint being inserted As you begin to lt turn the knob the existing waypoint in this position APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH automatically jumps down to the Figure 4 14 next position In this case SJI automatically moves to waypoint and KPIE changes to waypoint ED 8 figure 4 15 5 y 191020 gt C U N 9 e APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 4 15 4 5 Advanced GPS Operation 4 Complete the waypoint entry operation figure 4 16 8 HEL NOTE If adding a waypoint or way points such as adding SID STAR APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Approach procedures would exceed Figure 4 16 the capacity of FPL 0 KLN 89 B will notify you that it is deleting waypoints from the beginning of FPL 0 to make room for the addition APT VOR NDB INT USR FPL CAL SET 5 Press to display the waypoint Figure 4 17 page on the right side for the identifier just entered figure 4 17 gt ad 2
61. course deviation indicator CDI the deviation bar D bar should be indicating a half scale deviation to the right The TO FROM indicator should be showing FROM If the KLN 89 B is interfaced with a NAV indicator such that the KLN 89 B can read the selected course from the NAV indicator then the OBS field should display the same selected course as on the NAV indicator The RMI field always displays 130 degrees If the KLN 89 B is connected to a compatible RMI in the aircraft the RMI should indicate a bearing to the station of 130 degrees If any of the above checks fail do not use the associated indicator with the KLN 89 B If the KLN 89 B has passed the internal self test the bottom of the Self Test page will display Pass and all external annunciators should be illuminated If instead Fail is displayed recycle power to the KLN 89 B If the Self Test page still displays Fail the KLN 89 B requires repair and should not be used for navigation e D T Lam ad Ln 1 00121900 49 218 9 4 When you are ready to approve the Self test page press the button while the Ok is flashing If it happens not to be flashing press the button and use the right outer knob to move the cursor there 5 he next page displayed will be the Initialization page figure 3 8 Verify that the date displayed in the top left corner of the Initialization page is correct The KLN 89 B has an internal battery Figure
62. details on these programs NOTE Honeywell sends the update so that it arrives prior to the next effective date The new update may be installed any time prior to the effective date and the KLN 89 B will use the previous data up to the effective date and automatically begin using the new data on the effective date WARNING The accuracy of the data base information is only assured if it is used before the end of the effectivity period Use of out of date data base information is done entirely at the user s own risk 2 4 1 COMPUTER UPDATING OF THE DATA BASE Update information is sent to you on 3 5 disks In order to use the update program you must have access to a computer having a disk drive capable utilizing 3 5 inch 1 44 megabyte high density diskettes This computer also needs to have an available COM 1 or COM 2 ser ial port If you wish to perform updates in the cockpit an optional PC Interface kit must be used Included in the kit is an interface cable that plugs into both the computer and into the data loader jack The data loader jack is included with the KLN 89 B installation kit and is typically installed in the aircraft s instrument panel 2 5 Z 18ydeu eL D rmja D UJ 9 e L1 Data Base CAUTION The data base must be updated only while the air craft is on the ground The KLN 89 B does not perform any navigation function while the data base is being updated Since a data base update takes approximately
63. displayed If the time to start VNAV operation is greater than one hour then Vnv Armed is displayed When the time to VNAV operation is less than one hour then the NAV 1 page will display the time until VNAV operation will start For example Vnv 4 53 would be displayed if the time until VNAV operation is 4 minutes and 53 seconds If the VNAV function has started and is suggesting an altitude then the NAV 1 page will display this altitude For example Vnv 4300 would be displayed if the suggested altitude was 4300 feet APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 4 5 CALCULATOR PAGES The Calculator CAL pages are used for trip planning and calculation of a variety of flight related information They are convenient both on the ground before you begin your flight and in the air Data entered on any of the Calculator pages has no effect on naviga tion data provided on any Navigation NAV or Flight Plan FPL pages You may perform trip calculations without disturbing ongoing navigation NOTE The Calculator pages rely on pilot enterable inputs for groundspeed fuel flow fuel reserve requirements altitudes temperature airspeed etc These pages do not utilize inputs from fuel flow or air data sensors 4 5 1 THE CALCULATOR 1 CAL 1 PAGE The CAL 1 page allows you to do distance bearing time and mini mum enroute safe altitude ESA calculations that you might otherwise need a chart ruler and pocket calculator for The KLN 8
64. for Class B Class C CTA and TMA airspace These SUA areas are stored as cylinders of airspace so all altitudes below the upper limit of these areas are considered to be in the SUA The message prompt for a special use airspace alert will occur when the aircraft s position is at a point such that a projection of the air crafts existing track over the ground is approximately 10 minutes from penetrating the outer boundary of one of these areas It will also 3 69 C D T Lam ad 00121900 49 218 9 N 9 ca oD m a lt basic GPS Operation occur if the aircraft is u within approximately 222 nautical miles of one of 552 these areas even if thes x ASTE J aircraft s projected track yo gt over the ground won t actually penetrate the x SUA area figure 3 203 profs If of the SUA areas 4 is penetrated another 3 message will state zz ks Inside SUA fam ELI The SUA alert feature may be disabled or enabled on the Setup 7 SET 7 page shown in figure 3 204 Select the SET 7 page turn on the cursor es8 The right inner knob is used to choose between SUA ALERT ENABLED and SUA ALERT DIS APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH ABLED Figure 3 204 If the SUA alert feature has been enabled the KLN 89 B allows you to select a vertical buffer on the SET 7 anog page in order
65. for use in navigation A crop sprayer might want to create a waypoint on a field that is sprayed regularly for instance Another candidate might be a small airport which is not included in the KLN 89 B database To learn how to create a user defined waypoint see section 4 6 3 11 5 1 The User 0 USR 0 Page See figure 3 162 NOTE The USH 0 page is only displayed for waypoint identifiers that do not have a previously defined posi APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH tion Figure 3 162 Line 1 The identifier for the as yet undefined waypoint Lines 2 4 Cursor fields for the three possible user defined waypoint creation methods For information on creating user defined way points see section 4 6 3 11 5 2 The User 1 USR 1 Page See figure 3 163 Line 1 The user defined waypoint identifier preceded by an arrow if it iS Worn usaman the active waypoint Figure 3 163 Lines 2 3 The latitude and longitude of the user defined waypoint Line 4 The magnetic bearing to or the magnetic radial from the user defined waypoint and the distance Placing the cursor over the radial bearing field and pressing toggles between radial from and bearing to station 3 11 5 3 The User 2 USR 2 Page See figure 3 164 Line 1 The user defined waypoint identifier preceded by an arrow if it iS Wuru umasa the active waypoint Figure 3 164 Line 2 The identifier of the user defined waypoint s reference way point When th
66. frequency used outside the U S TWR control tower UNC unicom Part time operation such as for a control tower is indicated with an asterisk to the right of an airport frequency The frequencies associated with class B or C airspace CTA or TMA are VFR frequencies Airports which have one of these categories of frequencies also have APR and DEP which are IFR frequencies Where required APR DEP CL B CL C CTA and TMA frequencies are sectorized That is a frequency may be used only within a cer tain range of radials from a designated reference location The format for displaying the sectorization is to show the frequency first followed by the identifier of the associated reference point followed next by the associated altitude restrictions For example figure 3 144 shows that the Orlando approach control frequency 121 10 MHz is used between the 311 radial and the 60 radial from KMCO Orlando International Airport for altitudes at BEGGS MTM SCC and below 5500 feet Figure 3 144 In a few cases APR DEP CL B CL C CTA and TMA frequencies are sectorized such that the restrictions cannot be displayed on a sin gle page When this occurs the following message is displayed on the APT 5 page Text Of Freq Use Not Displayed 3 11 1 6 The Airport 6 APT 6 Page See figure 4 145 Line 1 The ICAO identifier see sec tion 2 3 of the airport an arrow precedes the identifier if it is the active waypoint Figure 3
67. is current line 2 will show the date when the data base expires figure 3 19 If on E the other hand the data base Is INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH out of date line 2 shows the date Figure 3 20 that it expired figure 3 20 The 3 6 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation KLN 89 B will still function with an out of date data base howev er you must exercise extreme caution and always verify that the data base information is correct before using information from an out of date data base Press to acknowledge the information on the Data Base page NOTE In some installations KLN 89B is configured for use in IFR En route and Terminal operations but not for non precision approaches If this is the case line 3 will read GPS Approaches Disabled and you will not have access to approaches in the data base WARNING The accuracy of the data base information is assured only if the data base is current Operators using an out of date data base do so entirely at their own risk NOTE If your KLN 89 B is interfaced with a remote Shadin fuel air data computer but no fuel flow indicator the Fuel on Board page will be displayed following the Data Base page figure 3 21 This page allows you to set the amount of fuel on board FOB and initializes the Other and 8 fuel planning pages apt VOR NOB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Possible units are gallons GAL pounds LB imperial gallons IM
68. is the last known position before the power was shut down the last time Unless the unit has been moved since its last use this position should be correct On the right side of the screen will be the identifier of the nearest airport in the data base with a radial and distance from that airport If you need to change the initial position to let s say John F Kennedy International KJFK move the 0770770707077 SET cursor to the WPT field and use Figure 3 16 the right inner knob to select a K as the first character of the identifier figure 3 16 Move the cursor to the right one character and select a J and then right again to select an F The final K should be filled in by the data Figure 3 17 base figure 3 17 When you press Lt the latitude and longitude fields will change to those of KJFK figure 3 18 If necessary the latitude and longi stT tude may be entered manually Figure 3 18 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL SET When all information on the Initialization page is correct move the cursor to Ok and press to move on If the GPS is for VFR use only the VFR page will be displayed to notify you of this The Data Base page will now be displayed with the cursor over Acknowledge Line 1 indicates whether an Americas North lt Americas South INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Americas S Atlantic or Pacific Figure 3 19 data base is being used If the data base
69. lowing message is displayed on the APT 4 page No Runway Data 3 11 1 5 The Airport 5 APT 5 Page See figure 3 143 Line 1 The ICAO identifier see section 2 3 of the airport an arrow precedes the identifier if it is the APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH active waypoint Figure 143 Lines 2 4 The VHF communication frequencies associated with the airport The type and frequency is listed The abbreviations are AAS aeronautical advisory service AFIS aerodrome flight information service ARVL arrival APR approach ASOS automated surface observation system ATF aerodrome traffic frequency ATIS automatic terminal information service AWOS automatic weather observing station CLB class B airspace formerly terminal control area VFR frequency CLC class C airspace formerly airport radar service area VFR frequency CLR clearance delivery CTA control area VFR frequency used outside the U S CTAF common traffic advisory frequency CTR center when center is used for approach departure control DEP departure DIR director approach control radar GRND ground control MCOM multicom MF mandatory frequency PCL pilot controlled lighting PTAX pre taxi clearance RAMP ramp taxi control e D T Lom ad 00121900 49 218 9 3 49 tS co x s OS 2 gt co Basic GPS Operation RDO radio RDR radar only frequency TMA terminal area VFR
70. middle of this line points to the SUA border telling you if it is directly ahead of you straight off your left wing etc Finally the distance to the SUA is displayed on the right side of line 4 If the aircraft is inside the SUA line 4 will read A C INSIDE SUA if you are above or below the SUA as indicated by the encoding altimeter line 4 will indicate this A C ABOVE SUA or A C BELOW SUA A single clockwise turn of the right inner knob selects the SUA 2 page which displays either the controlling ATC facility figure 3 94 or if the spe cial use airspace is a Class B Class C CTA or TMA the page will be dis played as in figure 3 95 instructing APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH gt CLR you to press to see the APT 5 Figure 3 95 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 3 94 3 30 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation page airport communications for the primary airport so that the cor rect communications frequency may be determined To scan through the remainder of the nearest SUA areas pull the right inner knob to the out position and turn it clockwise to view the SUA pages for the second nearest through fifth nearest SUAs NOTE The KLN 89 B displays the five nearest SUAs regardless of your present altitude and the altitude limits of the SUA For instance it will include SUAs specified as Below 6000ft even if you are cruis ing at 10 000 feet
71. misleading positioning information For this reason a GPS receiver can t rely on the GPS satellites to tell it when there is a pos sible error The words receiver autonomous indicate that the GPS 3 gt lt Ti 1 99 Appendix F receiver on it s own can detect an inaccuracy in the GPS system It does this by using distance measurements from as many satellites as possible to check the consistency of the position this is called an over determined position solution S gt lt L a co nao a o lt If there are not enough satellites in view to assure the position integri ty the KLN 89 B notifies the pilot Five measurements with good geometry relative positions of the satellites are needed to provide RAIM This means that at least five satellites or four satellites and a pressure altitude input from the aircraft s altimeter are required to assure RAIM availability Likewise if this check shows some incon sistency in the position the KLN 89 B notifies the user that other navigation sources should be used to cross check the position Additionally sometimes the receiver is unable to assure the position to enough accuracy for the phase of flight due to the location of the satellites at that instant RAIM availability is very seldom a difficulty when in the en route and terminal phases of navigation The allowable limits are much tighter when a non precisio
72. not sure which time zone to choose UTC Coordinated Universal Time also called Zulu is always a safe choice IT D T Lom ad Ln 1 00121900 49 218 9 The local time zone LCL is selected on the SET 2 page and is defined to be a certain time offset from Zulu UTC Once you have selected the desired time zone position the cur sor over the entire time field and select the correct hour with the right inner knob figure 3 14 Since 24 hour time is used be sure to add 12 if the time is after asum 1 00 P M 2 30 P M becomes Figure 3 14 1430 Now move the cursor to the tens of minutes position and select the desired value and repeat this process for the last digit of the time field When the correct time has been entered figure 3 15 press to start the clock running Don t worry that you can t update the seconds The KLN 89 B system time will automatically be correct ed very precisely once a satellite APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH is received Figure 3 15 3 5 d T N 4 A ca oD eet a Be lt basic GPS Operation 7 10 To aid the GPS receiver in acquiring your position it helps to have a reasonable idea of where you are and the Initialization page is where you have the chance to set this initial position Check to see if the displayed initial position is where you actually are This latitude longitude
73. of Austin and 124 90 MHz is the appropriate frequency to use from 3 degrees to 170 degrees You turn to the NAV 4 page so that we can see the outer boundary of the Austin Class C airspace relative to our location and route After you call Austin approach control for clearance into the Class C airspace you view the rest of the APT pages for KAUS to determine the field elevation and available runways After landing the KLN 89 B is turned off either by rotating the KLN 89 B power knob to OFF or with the avionics master switch if one is installed 3 75 C D T Lom ad Ln 1 00121900 49 218 9 basic GPS Operation This page intentionally left blank tS co x o g OS gt co 3 74 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Advanced GPS Operation 4 ADVANCED GPS OPERATION 4 1 CREATING AND MODIFYING FLIGHT PLANS The following rules and considerations apply to KLN 89 B flight plans e The KLN 89 B is capable of storing in its memory 25 flight plans plus an active flight plan e Each of the flight plans may contain up to 20 waypoints The waypoints may consist of any combination of published waypoints from the data base or user created waypoints The active flight plan may contain up to 35 waypoints if it includes approach and SID STAR waypoints e flight plans are numbered 0 through 25 FPL 0 FPL 1 FPL 2 FPL 25 e The active flight plan is always FP
74. on to the map display area on the right side of the screen In all KLN 89 B installations there are three common map orientation formats that may be selected on the NAV 4 page a True North up display a desired track up display or an actual track up dis play In addition if the KLN 89 B is interfaced with a source of heading in a compatible format then a heading up presentation may also be selected When the North up display is selected viewing the NAV 4 page is like looking at a navigation chart with North at the top When the desired track up display is selected the NAV 4 page is like looking at a chart that is turned so that your course line is always pointing up When the actual track up display is selected viewing the NAV 4 page is like looking at a chart that is turned so that the direction the aircraft is tracking over the ground is pointing up Ina no wind condition actual track is identical to the aircrafts heading CAUTION When using the actual track up format it is typical for there to be a slight delay from the time a heading change is made until the correct map orientation is displayed Be careful when using either the desired track up display or the actual track up display to not think that a heading up display is being used 3 41 e D T Lom ad Ln 1 00121900 49 218 9 d N e A ca oD eet a lt basic GPS Operation When you
75. or STAR or press and then to delete the entire procedure NOTE Any waypoints manually added to a SID or STAR will be deleted if the SID or STAR is changed or deleted using the above procedure 5 2 4 EXAMPLE OF A SID PROCEDURE To illustrate the use of the KLN 89B with a SID the Porte Nine departure loaded into the flight plan in section 5 2 1 will be used Remember that RWO1B was selected meaning that the procedure is applicable to both runways 1L and 1H The Fellows FLW transition was also selected This procedure is one of the more difficult that you are likely to come across Most procedures are not this difficult but this SID serves as a good example for what steps to take when you encounter a difficult procedure To fly this procedure use the following steps and refer to the chart for this SID figure 5 43 1 Load the SID as described in section 5 2 1 2 he procedure states Intercept and proceed via SFO R 350 cross the 4 DME fix at or above 1600 To accomplish this por tion of the SID put the KLN 89B into the OBS mode with SFO04 as the active waypoint and make 350 the selected course It is easiest to accomplish these steps before take off SFO04 is the waypoint that is 4 DME from the SFO VORTAC and 350 is the inbound course to this fix After take off climb to 1600 as required by the SID Once the aircraft reaches SFO04 turn left to a heading of 200 At this point it is necessary to manually ch
76. pass ELMOO the KLN 89B will auto matically sequence to the next waypoint in the approach LAX18 G 13 dey9 gt e 9 e cD 9 2 e gt c gt JJ 5 11 Approaches and SID STARs 4 This may be a good time to select the NAV 4 page This page is especially useful for getting a feeling of where you are in the approach figure 5 13 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 5 13 5 As the aircraft approaches the LAX18 waypoint the KLN 89B will again provide waypoint alerting As the aircraft passes LAX18 and sequences to FITON the KLN 89B will provide a message telling you to set the external indicator CDI or HSI to a new value If desired track DTK is shown on the screen this value will flash when the external selected course does not match the DTK within 10 6 As the aircraft approaches the FAF FREBY it is a good idea to check over the status of the KLN 89B Look at the KLN 89B screen to verify that LEG sequencing is selected Remember the KLN 89B will not transition to the approach active mode if the OBS mode is selected If the KLN 89B shares an HSI or CDI with other NAV sources it is also good to verify that the NAV GPS Switch is set to GPS 7 By the time the aircraft is 2 NM from FREBY figure 5 14 the Final Approach Fix the KLN 89B will make a prediction to see if integrity Will be available at the APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL C
77. points along the arc the KLN 89B will display a new value in the bottom right corner of the display on the NAV 4 page This new bit of informa tion is denoted by the letters ARC followed by three numbers The three numbers represent the current radial that you are on relative to the reference VOR DME The arc radial is forced into this position when the aircraft is 30 NM from the arc The ARC display is shown in figure 5 24 Just watch this value and when it reads the same as one of the step down points you can descend as necessary his particular example does not have such points but there are quite a few approaches that do 5 25 G 13 dey9 gt 9 e cD 9 2 e gt c gt JJ Chapter 5 o er d o cO a e a a e p Approaches and SID STARs NOTE Autopilot performance may not be satisfactory if coupled in the NAV mode while flying the arc Many autopilots were never designed to fly curved paths If autopilot performance is not satisfac tory while flying DME arcs select the HDG mode and keep changing the heading bug to keep the D bar centered 12 As the aircraft approaches the end of the arc the KLN 89B will provide waypoint alerting and turn anticipation to the next leg 13 When the aircraft is 2 NM from FOW VOR the FAF the KLN 89B will attempt to transition to the approach active mode Since the DME ar
78. s Guide Appendix COUNTRY ABBREVIATIONS Cont d ARE United Arab Emirates ARG Argentina ASM American Western Samoa ATG Antigua Barbuda AUS Australia AUT Austria BDI Burundi BEL Belgium BEN Benin BFA Burkina Faso BGD Bangladesh BGR Bulgaria BHR Bahrain BHS Bahamas BHU Bhutan BLZ Belize BMU Bermuda BOL Bolivia BOS Bosnia Herzegovia BRA Brazil BRB Barbados BRN Brunel BWA Botswana CAF Central African Republic CAN Canada CHE Switzerland CHL Chile Easter Isl CHN China CIV Ivory Coast 22 CMR Cameroon E CNR Canary Islands E COG Congo COK Cook Islands COL Colombia San Andres CRI Costa Rica CRO Croatia CSK Czechoslovakia CUB Cuba CYM Cayman Islands CYP Cypress D 3 sa uS S a sb o n 22 Appendix COUNTRY ABBREVIATIONS Cont d DEU DJI DMA DNK DOM DZA ECU EGY ERI ESP ETH FIN FJI FLK FRA GAB GBR GHA GIB GIN GLP GMB GNB GNQ GPV GRC GRD GRL GTM GUF GUY HKG HND HTI HUN IDN IND IOT IRL IRN Germany Djibouti Dominica Denmark Dominican Republic Algeria Ecuador Egypt Eritrea Spain Ethiopia Finland Fiji Tonga Falkland Islands France Gabon United Kingdom Ghana Gibraltar Guinea Guadeloupe Martinique Gambia Guinea Bissau Equatorial Guinea Cape Verde Greece Grenada Greenland Guatemala French Guiana Guyana Hong Kong Honduras Haiti Hungary Indonesia India British Indian Ocean Territory
79. six months or longer Collecting new almanac data takes place auto matically if the data is more than six months old If the almanac data is out of date and needs to be collected the KLN 89 B will take a few minutes to acquire your present position usually about six 6 minutes but not more than 12 minutes The Self Test Initialization and Data Base pages should be approved The aircraft must be located such that the GPS antenna has an unobstructed view of the sky so that required satellite signals are 3 18 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation not being blocked If possible position the aircraft away from hangars or other obstructions It is very helpful for the KLN 89 B to have the correct time date and position to be able to determine which satellites should be in view This information is stored in the battery backed memory of the KLN 89 B so it is not normally required to update it If the KLN 89 B has the correct time date and position then the time to first fix will usually be less than two 2 minutes If this information is not correct then the KLN 89 B will start to look for any satellites Eventually the KLN 89 B will find enough satellites to determine the position of the aircraft This process can take as long as 12 minutes It is possible for you to update this information manually which will allow the KLN 89 B to reach a NAV ready status much faster To set the time and date follow steps 5 a
80. the OBS value In these situ ations the KLN 89 B will provide a scratchpad message that will tell you what OBS value should be selected to go direct to the active waypoint figure 4 123 Figure 4 123 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 4 7 7 ACTIVATING A WAYPOINT WHILE IN THE OBS MODE While in the OBS mode you may activate another waypoint by using the normal Direct To method or by using a second method This sec ond method activates another waypoint without changing the selected course OBS In other words when the new waypoint is activated the D Bar is not necessarily recentered In figure 4 124 the KLN 89 B is in the OBS mode and the selected course is 149 You have just crossed ARG and desire to activate the next waypoint in the flight plan GQE without recentering the D Figure 4 124 Bar APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 4 39 y 191020 gt C U N 9 e Advanced GPS Operation To activate a waypoint in OBS mode without changing the selected course 1 Press figure 4 125 The rules described in section 3 8 Direct To Operation dictate which waypoint identifier will be ini tially displayed on the Direct To Figure 4 125 page 2 Press a second time The annunciation DIRECT TO changes to ACTIVATE figure 4 126 Repeated Dresses of Cause 6APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET O
81. the easiest for this applica tion Figure 4 42 VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL To fly direct to a waypoint in the active flight plan FPL 0 1 Select the FPL 0 page Z 2 M VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET 2 Turn on the cursor lesr and use Figure 4 43 the left outer knob to position the cursor over the desired waypoint figure 4 42 3 Press J The display will change to the Direct To Page VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL figure 4 43 with the identifier of Figure 4 44 the selected waypoint 4 Press to approve the Direct To The NAV 1 page will be displayed figure 4 44 reflecting the new active waypoint 5 f you now turn back to the FPL 0 page you will see that the active waypoint is now preceded by an arrow only instead of the symbol figure 4 45 This is because there is no from waypoint in the flight plan VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL Figure 4 45 If it is desired to cancel the Direct To operation prior to reaching the Direct To waypoint in order to proceed along the flight plan leg press gt J then press Len then Lent 4 12 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Advanced GPS Operation 4 2 5 VIEWING DISTANCE ETE ETA OR DESIRED TRACK TO FLIGHT PLAN WAYPOINTS The active flight plan FPL 0 page has a data field to the right of each waypoint in the flight plan This field may be used to display the cumulative distance Dis from the present position to ea
82. to leave the map display This is done by pulling the right inner knob to the out or scan position This will cause the identifier for the active waypoint to be displayed in the bottom right corner of the screen figure 3 135 The waypoint displayed in this area will be the default waypoint when is pressed By turning the right inner uis uo knob it is possible to scan through the voR NOB INT USR ACT NAV FPL waypoints of the active flight plan Figure 3 135 FPL 0 Turning the knob clockwise will scan through the waypoints in sequence until the end of the flight plan is reached Turning the knob counter clockwise will scan through the active flight plan in reverse order until the beginning of the flight plan is reached Pushing the right inner knob back to the in position will remove this text from the map display area The following hints will make using the NAV 4 page more enjoyable e t is easy to clutter the display with so much data that it is unus able Select a range scale that allows an uncluttered presentation of the chosen SUAs VORs and airports Or select another combination of these from the menu Experiment and continue to make new selections for different phases of your trip 3 44 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation e Press to instantly declutter the SUA VOR and airport selections from the graphics display Flight plan and Direct To waypoints will still be displayed Press again to re
83. to provide an additional layer of protection from inadvertently APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH entering an SUA To select a vertical Figure 3 205 buffer make sure the SUA alert fea ture has been enabled Turn on the cursor lesr figure 3 205 and then use the right inner knob to select the buffer figure 3 206 The buffer may APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH be selected in one hundred foot or ten meter increments After the desired Figure 3 206 selection has been made turn the off amp f a S The vertical buffer serves to stretch the SUA area in both directions up and down by the selected buffer altitude For example let s say you have selected a buffer of 1 000 feet and the actual SUA area exists from 5 000 feet MSL to 12 000 feet MSL In this case you will receive SUA alert messages if you fly at any altitude between 4 000 and 13 000 feet MSL 3 70 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation CAUTION It is the pilot s responsibility to avoid those areas of special use airspace where ATC clearance to penetrate is required but has not been obtained The KLN 89 B s special use airspace alert is only a tool to assist the pilot and should never be relied upon as the sole means of avoiding these areas NOTE Special Use Airspace alerting is disabled when the KLN 89B is in the approach arm or approach active modes 3 18 SAMPLE TRIP We ve talked a lot about the features of th
84. waypoint identifier figure 3 1 11 An arrow precedes the APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH active waypoint identifier Figure 3 111 Line 2 A cyclic field which can either be 1 a course deviation indicator CDI that graphically displays left and right deviation from desired course figure 3 111 2 The direction to fly to intercept the desired track and the crosstrack distance figure 3 112 or 3 the current CDI scale in use This is a cyclic field so you can change back and forth between the APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH by turning on the cursor lesr over 5 the second line and pressing the button The vertical bar operates like a navigation deviation needle on a conventional CDI or HSI using VOR Localizer navigation An on course indication is displayed when the vertical deviation bar is centered on the triangle in the middle of the CDI In en route use each dot represents one nautical mile deviation from the desired track Different CDI scales are used during terminal and non preci sion approach flight with KLN 89B For now let s talk only about en route operations A vertical deviation bar positioned two dots to the 3 36 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation right of the center triangle indicates the aircraft is two nautical miles to the left of course figure 3 113 The center triangle also serves as APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure
85. x Chapter 4 e a a e c e a C5 ET ce 3 T 4 5 7 THE CALCULATOR 7 CAL 7 PAGE The CAL 7 page is used to determine the present wind direction and speed In addition the headwind or tailwind component of the wind is displayed To calculate the winds aloft 1 Turn on the cursor lesr 4 28 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Advanced GPS Operation 2 Enter the aircrafts true airspeed by using the right inner knob figure 4 91 If the CAL 6 page was previously used to calculate true airspeed it will already be displayed APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 4 91 3 Use the right outer knob to move the cursor to the Hdg field and then use the right inner knob to enter the aircraft s heading figure WWW L 4 92 The headwind or tailwind 1 and the wind direction and speed are now displayed The wind direction is relative to true North NOTE The wind calculations are only correct when you have entered the correct aircraft heading and true airspeed Make sure to re enter new values if you change airspeed or heading NOTE If the KLN89 B is interfaced with a compatible source of heading information line 2 automatically displays the aircraft s head ing Heading is then automatically input and used in the wind calculation displayed on the CAL 7 page If the KLN89 B is inter faced with a compatible air data system in addition to a compatible headin
86. you actually fly to the beginning of an arc especially in a radar environment Instead the flight path of the aircraft generally intersects the arc at some point Once the aircraft is near the arc it is then possible to turn so that the arc distance is maintained until time to turn to the inbound fix The following example will show how DME arc procedures are flown using the KLN 89B This example approach will be to use the VOR RWY 12 approach to Owatonna Minnesota KOWA The approach plate for this approach is in figure 5 22 Assume that the aircraft is approaching from the North and is in a radar environment 1 ATC assigns the VOR RWY 12 approach Turn to the APT 8 page for KOWA to select the lms gt lt approach You select the VOR 12 approach and the KLN 89B pre sents the IAF selection page Figure 5 21 figure 5 21 2 There are five choices for the IAF Three of these choices you can recognize but the other two DO40L and D220L are unfamil iar and not shown on this chart These two waypoints are the data base identifiers for the ends of the arc DO40L means DME arc point 040 is the radial on which the waypoint lies and L indi cates the distance of the arc L is the twelfth letter of the alphabet so the L indicates that this is a 12 DME arc In a similar manner D220L can also be decoded In this example the aircraft is approaching from the north so the DO40L IAF will be selected 3 The KLN 89B knows that this point is as
87. you scan clockwise with the right inner knob 1 2 3 9 the next scan position is the beginning of the complete list The nearest list can 7707707 Figure 3 90 3 27 e D T Lom ad Ln 1 00121900 49 218 9 N A ca oD p jmd a X lt Basic GPS Operation only be reached by scanning backwards It does not wrap around after the last waypoint in the complete list Waypoint pages displayed in the nearest list do not contain a latitude and longitude position as they do in the complete list Instead the bearing and distance to the waypoint or the radial and distance from the waypoint are displayed In addition nearest airport pages dis play the length surface and lighting of the longest runway Once the nearest waypoint is being displayed the other waypoint pages for example APT 2 and APT 3 for that airport are available for display by making sure the right inner knob is pushed in and then turning it to select the desired airport page 3 8 1 1 Nearest Airport Criteria The nine airports in the nearest list are the nine airports which meet the criteria selected on the Setup 6 SET 6 page For example you probably wouldn t want to take a turboprop into a 1500 foot grass strip The SET 6 page allows you to specify what criteria you want an airport to meet before it is considered for the nearest airport list To specify the ne
88. 00 of the time GPS POSITION DETERMINING CONCEPT The technique used to determine position is fundamentally very sim ple The complicated part is accounting for and correcting all the possible errors in the position The GPS receiver is able to determine the time it takes a radio signal to travel from the satellite to the GPS antenna Since this radio signal travels at the speed of light approximately 186 000 statute miles per second the time delay can very easily be used to determine the receiver s distance from a given satellite If measurements are taken from four satellites or three satellites and an input from an aircraft altimeter the receiver can identify its position very precisely F 1 I gt lt T 1 99 Appendix F For example the GPS receiver might determine that it is exactly 12 000 miles from satellite A 12 700 miles from satellite B and 13 100 miles from satellite C At the same time the aircraft s encod ing altimeter might be indicating an altitude of 9 500 feet MSL There is only one point in space that satisfies these four measurements D gt lt L a co N a oa 55 n 12 000 NM 12 700 NM 13 100 NM GPS DATA SIGNALS Two of the primary types of signals that the GPS satellites broadcast are almanac and ephemeris data These signals enable the GPS receiver to quickly lock on to the satellites in view Otherwise the
89. 1 INT 1 Page See figure 3 160 Line 1 The intersection identifier preceded by an arrow if it is the active waypoint Figure 3 160 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Lines 2 3 The latitude and longitude of the intersection Line 4 The magnetic bearing to or the magnetic radial from the user defined waypoint and the distance Placing the cursor over the radial bearing field and pressing toggles between radial from and bearing to station 3 11 4 2 The Intersection 2 INT 2 Page See figure 3 161 Line 1 The intersection identifier APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH preceded by an arrow if it is the active waypoint Figure 3 161 Line 2 The identifier of the intersection s reference waypoint When this page is first viewed the reference waypoint is the nearest VOR to the intersection The reference waypoint may be changed by the pilot However once you leave this page and come back the refer ence waypoint reverts back to a nearby VOR Line 3 The magnetic radial from the reference waypoint to the inter section Line 4 The distance from the reference waypoint to the intersection 3 55 e D T Lom ad 00121900 49 218 9 EE N 4 A ca oD m ru a Be lt basic GPS Operation 3 11 5 USER WAYPOINT PAGES The User waypoint pages USR 0 USR 1 USR 2 and USR 3 allow you to create custom waypoints
90. 3 113 the CDI s TO FROM indicator and operates in the same manner as a conventional CDI TO FROM indica tor a triangle pointing up indicates to the active waypoint while a down triangle figure 3 114 Figure 3 114 indicates from the active waypoint The word FLAG is displayed over the CDI when the KLN 89 B is not usable for navigation figure 3 115 NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL Figure 3 115 C D T Lom ad The numerical crosstrack distance display is especially handy when more than five nautical miles off of course naturally you yourself would never deviate more than five nm off course but not everyone is as good a pilot as you are If your crosstrack distance was 13 1 nautical miles left COCA Bee NAVEL of course the graphic CDI needle will Figure 3 116 be pegged on the right side which doesn t tell you much But this presentation will show you exactly how far off course you are figure 3 116 When the KLN 89 B is not usable for navigation the crosstrack distance will be dashed out figure 3 117 uoljeiadg 49 218 9 NDB INT USR ACT FPL Figure 3 117 3 37 basic GPS Operation Line 3 Magnetic desired track and magnetic actual track see Appendix A for navigation terms In normal on course flight it is desirable to steer the aircraft to keep these two numbers equal Line 4 A cyclic field which can display either
91. 3 8 powered calendar clock so the date and time normally don t require setting The battery has a life of approximately 3 years In addition the KLN 89 B s system date and time are automati APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 3 3 basic GPS Operation cally updated very precisely when at least one satellite is being received However if for some reason the date or time are incor rect it is necessary to enter the correct date or time so that the KLN 89 B can reach the navigation mode quickly The date should be correct and the time should be correct within ten minutes so that the KLN 89 B will start looking for the correct satellites If the date is incorrect rotate the right outer knob counterclockwise until the cursor is over the entire date field figure 3 9 Rotate the TRC GPM Ere GEE SHE E right inner knob until the correct day of the month is displayed figure 3 10 Then move the cursor to the month field by rotat ing the outer knob one click clockwise and change the month as necessary Use the same methods to select the correct year Figure 3 10 figure 3 11 When the date is correct press LENT Figure 3 9 INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET 6 Verify that the time displayed in the upper right corner of the Initialization page is correct to within ten minutes of the actual time Remember once the KLN 89 B receives the first satellite it will automatically be very accurately updated by the s
92. 3 8 3 Viewing the Nearest Flight Service Station Frequencies The KLN 89 B stores in its data base the locations of Flight Service Stations FSS and their remote communications sites In addition the KLN 89 B determines which two of these FSS points of commu nication are closest to your present location What a convenience for you Next time you want to file a flight plan from the air or contact an FSS for some other reason you can easily use the KLN 89 B to determine a suitable FSS and the appropriate frequency NOTE some areas of the world the KLN 89 B provides the loca tion of the nearest point of communication with a facility providing information INF or radio RDO services e D T Lom ad 00121900 49 218 9 Pressing the button and selecting the FSS option will display two of the nearest points of communication with Flight Service Stations There will normally be two FSS 1 pages one for each of the two points of contact The name of the FSS is at the top of the page There can be from one to three frequencies included for a point of contact figure 3 96 Remember that in the U S the frequency 122 00 MHz is used for Flight Watch and the fre quency 123 60 MHz is used for Aeronautical Advisory Service As you know it is often possible to com municate with an FSS by transmitting Figure 3 96 on 122 10 MHz and listening on the VOR frequency In cases like this the FSS 1 page displays the fre
93. 36 3 38 3 45 Brightness See Display brightness C CAL 1 distance bearing ESA page 4 22 CAL 2 fuel planning page 4 23 CAL 3 setting an alarm page 4 25 CAL 4 pressure altitude page 4 26 CAL 5 density altitude page 4 27 2 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Index CAL 6 True Airspeed page 4 27 CAL 7 Wind direction speed page 4 28 CAL 8 Sunrise Sunset page 4 29 Canadian province abbreviations D 2 Cancel Direct To operation 3 35 4 12 CDI External 1 1 Internal 3 36 Scale factor 3 36 4 40 Changing Approaches 5 9 SIDs 5 33 STARs 5 33 Characters gt 9 17 3 36 4 8 3 64 9 11 City of airport 3 45 Clear button 3 11 3 17 Communication frequencies Airports 3 49 Centers 3 32 Flight Service Stations 3 31 Computer data base updating 2 5 Configuration module 1 2 Controls 3 0 Country abbreviations D 2 Course fix 5 7 Course reversal 5 15 Coverage area Data base 2 0 GPS 3 1 4 46 Change first waypoint identifier character 3 15 Creating Flight plans 4 1 User waypoint at known latitude longitude 4 32 User waypoint at present position 4 31 User waypoint from another waypoint 4 33 Crosstrack distance 3 37 A 1 CRSR button 3 1 1 CTA 3 47 Cursor 3 11 Cyclic field gt 3 17 1 3 Index D Data base Airports 3 45 Card 2 5 Contents 2 1 Currency requirement for approach use 5 1 Functions 2 1 Geographical regions 2 0 ICAO identifiers 2 4 Intersections 3 55 NDBs 3 54 Operatin
94. 7 35 58 36 60 37 62 38 63 39 65 40 67 41 68 42 70 43 72 44 73 45 75 46 77 47 18 48 80 49 82 50 83 51 85 52 87 53 88 54 90 55 92 56 93 57 95 58 97 59 98 For example 35 46 24 is the same as 35 46 40 32 15 58 is the same as 32 15 97 e c eg cu a 5 COs G r E 2 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Appendix F APPENDIX F GPS PRIMER BACKGROUND The Global Positioning System GPS is a satellite based navigation system that was originally conceived and implemented by the United States Department of Defense DoD The system is however avail able to all civilian users free of charge GPS provides extremely precise position velocity and time information The satellites are not geosynchronous as is the case with many weather and television satellites That is each satellite is not above a fixed spot on the Earth all the time but rather is continuously moving across the sky In fact each satellite completely orbits the Earth two times per day The Department of Defense imposes an intentional accuracy degra dation of the GPS system This degradation is known as Selective Availability SA When SA is active only U S military users have access to full GPS accuracy For civilian users position accuracy is degraded to no worse than 100 meters At the time of this writing Selective Availability is on and therefore accuracy is degraded near ly 1
95. 9 e Chapter 4 A e N ou C e ca Advanced GPS Operation 2 The cursor should be on and over the selected altitude field on the right side of line 2 If the cursor is not on press esr 3 Enter the desired altitude of 1900 feet in the selected altitude field using the right inner knob The altitude may be entered in 100 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL foot or 10 meter increments fig ure 4 60 Figure 4 60 NOTE If the KLN 89 B does not have an altitude input the indicat ed altitude field on the left side of line 2 will be preceded by a colon indicating that you should manually enter the aircraft s pre sent altitude as well as the desired altitude 4 Use the right outer knob to move the cursor to the offset field adja cent to the active waypoint 5 identifier Entering offset allows you to reach the desired APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV CAL SET OTH altitude a specified distance Figure 4 61 before or after reaching the way point If you wished to reach a certain altitude 5 miles after passing a waypoint you would enter 05 In this example you desire to reach traffic pattern altitude two nautical miles prior to the airport which allows sufficient time to slow down and prepare for the landing Enter an offset of 02 nm figure 4 61 5 Use the right outer knob to move the cursor to the groundspeed GS field Use the right inner knob to s
96. 9 B will perform these calculations either from waypoint to waypoint for in flight calculations your present position can be one of the way points or for one of your flight plans active or stored 4 21 y 1e1deu gt C U N 9 e Chapter 4 A e N ou C e ca Advanced GPS Operation To calculate distance bearing time and ESA from waypoint to waypoint 1 From the CAL 1 page figure 4 68 turn on the cursor It will appear over a cyclic field that either displays Wpt waypoint to Way APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH point or Fpl flight plan Figure 4 68 For this type of calculation the cyclic field should display Wpt Press to toggle if this is not the case figure 4 69 Turn the right outer knob clockwise Figure 4 69 to move the cursor to the from waypoint in the upper right corner ofthe screen figure 4 70 Enter the desired identifier for the from waypoint and press You will be shown the waypoint page for the waypoint you entered Figure 4 70 Press again to approve APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH NOTE On either of the two waypoint fields on this page you can select your present position To do this press while the cursor is on the desired waypoint field The results will only be displayed when your KLN 89 B is receivi
97. 910207 4 5 3 THE CALCULATOR 3 CAL 3 PAGE gt co U N 9 e The CAL 3 page may be used to set a timed alarm Instances where you might want to use it include as a reminder to switch between left and right fuel tanks or maybe just to remind you to eat lunch Line 1 of the CAL 3 page shows the current time in the system time zone The alarm may be set by either of two methods entering the time of day you wish the alarm to activate or the time interval from present time i e twenty minutes from now Line 4 displays the elapsed time since the KLN89 B was turned on 4 25 Chapter 4 e A e cO ou C e ca Advanced GPS Operation To set the alarm 1 Turn on the cursor lesr If necessary change the system time zone to the desired one on line 1 of the CAL 3 page To set the alarm to activate at a certain time more the cursor to the at field on line 2 Select the desired hours and then minutes figure 4 83 Notice that as you change it the interval from pre sent time to alarm time is updated APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL on neo Figure 4 83 To set the alarm to activate in a certain length of time move the cursor to the in field on line 3 and select the desired hours and min utes up to 9 hours and 59 minutes APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET figure 4 84 Turn off the cursor Figure 4 84
98. AL SET OTH FAF and at the MAP If the pre Figure 5 14 diction indicates that integrity monitoring will be available and RAIM is currently available the KLN 89B will change the GPS APR annunciator to read ACTV At this time the KLN 89B will also start to change the CDI scale factor By the time the aircraft reaches the FAF FREBY the CDI scale factor will be down to 0 3 NM 8 The fix NOELE is not included in the list of waypoints provided in the data base You will need to identify this point by using the along track distances given in the profile view of the approach plate In this example NOELE is located 1 3 NM from the MAP When the distance to MA25B is 1 3 NM then the aircraft is at NOELE and you can descend to the MDA for this approach NOTE Some approach procedures require that you add up several along track distances to be able to identify a step down fix Chapter 5 N er d o cO a e a a e p 5 12 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Approaches and SID STARs The KLN 89B will again provide waypoint alerting as you approach MA25B This is shown on the NAV 4 page by a flashing active waypoint identifier figure 5 15 Figure 5 15 NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH The following steps would need to be performed if a missed approach is required 11 Upon reaching MA25B and not seeing the runway you decide to perform a missed app
99. ANDER DOMESTIC GAN GANDER OCEANIC GEN GENEVA GEO GEORGETOWN GUA GUANGZHOU D 10 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Appendix ARTCC ABBREVIATIONS Cont d GUY GUAYAQUIL HAN HANOI HAR HARARE HAV HAVANA HK HONG KONG HNR HONIARA HOC HOCHIMINH HON HONOLULU CERAP HOU HOUSTON HOU HOUSTON OCEANIC IND INDIANAPOLIS IRK IRKUTSK ISL ISLA DE PASCUA IST ISTANBUL JAK JAKARTA JAX JACKSONVILLE JED JEDDAH JOH JOHANNESBURG KAB KABUL KAL KALININGRAD KAM KAMENNYI MYS KAN KANO KAR KARACHI KAT KATHMANDU KAZ KAZAN KC KANSAS CITY KHA KHABAROVSK X KHR KHARKOV EE KHT KHATANGA 22 KIE KIEV zu KIG KIGALI KIN KINGSTON KIR KIRENSK KIS KISANGANI KK KOTA KINABALU KL KUALA LUMPUR KM KHANTY MANSIYSK KNS KINSHASA KO KZYL ORDA KOL KOLPASHEVO D 11 E sa es os a gt o c a2 Appendix ARTCC ABBREVIATIONS Cont d KOS KRA KRS KRV KSH KTM KUN KUR LAH LAN LAP LAX LIL LIM LIS LJU LON LUA LUB LUS LVO MAD MAG MAI MAL MAN MAR MAU MAZ MAZ MDR MEL MEM MEN MER MEX MGD MIA MIA MIL KOSTANAY KRASNOVODSK KRASNOYARSK KIROV KISHINAU KHARTOUM KUNMING KURGAN LAHORE LANZHOU LA PAZ LOS ANGELES LILONGWE LIMA LISBON LJUBLJANA LONDON LUANDA LUBUMBASHI LUSAKA LVOV MADRID MAGADAN MAIQUETIA MALE MANILA MARSEILLE MAURITIUS MAZATLAN MAZATLAN OCEANIC MADRAS MELBOURNE MEMPHIS MENDOZA MERIDA MEXICO MAGDAGACHI MIAMI MIAMI OCEANIC MILAN D 12
100. APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH page figure 4 23 If a mistake Figure 4 23 was made and you do not wish to clear this flight plan press again 4 Press to clear the flight plan The flight plan page Will appear APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH as in figure 4 24 Figure 4 24 Z 4 1 7 STORING 0 AS NUMBERED FLIGHT PLAN The active flight plan may be loaded into a numbered flight plan so that it can be recalled for later use This may be desirable for example if the active flight plan was originally created on the FPL 0 page and not as a numbered flight plan To store the active flight plan as a numbered flight plan 1 Select a numbered flight plan page which does not contain any waypoints figure 4 24 If none exist use the procedure described in section 4 1 6 Deleting Flight Plans to clear a flight plan which is no longer required 2 Turn on the cursor lesr It will appear over the blank first waypoint position figure 4 25 y 1910207 gt C U N 9 e APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 4 25 3 Rotate the right outer knob coun terclockwise to position the Cursor Over Copy FPL 0 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH figure 4 26 Figure 4 26 4 7 Chapter 4 A e N ou C e ca Advanced GPS Operation 4
101. After departure control has directed squawk 1200 frequency change approved you decide it would be a good idea to obtain VFR flight following To obtain the frequency for Center press the button move the cursor to the CTR selection and press r The KLN 89 B indicates that for our position we should be able to contact Memphis Center on 118 85 MHz We ve only flown about 100 nautical miles but we begin wonder ing where we would go if an engine suddenly started running rough We decide to use the KLN 89 B to determine where the nearest airports are from our present location To view the near est airports press wr and then press The nearest airport is Hope Municipal M18 which is eight nautical miles from our posi tion on a bearing to the airport of 11 degrees You now rotate the right inner knob to view the other APT pages for Hope Municipal We learn for example that it is located in Hope Arkansas and has two hard surface runways that are each 5500 feet in length By pulling the right inner knob to the out position you may now scan clockwise through the remaining eight airports in the nearest airport list 3 72 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation 5 For the majority of the en route portion of the flight you select the NAV 4 page s moving map display Pressing the right button you select the 30 nautical mile range scale using the right inner knob Moving the cursor to Menu And pressing
102. B will Figure 4 6 disable turn anticipation for that way point if previously enabled The KLN 89 B will enable turn anticipation after the waypoint has been passed if turn anticipation was previously enabled If En Route is selected then normal turn anticipation occurs 9 Use the same procedure to enter the rest of the waypoints in the Bag flight plan figure 4 7 If the flight 85 Rese plan consists of three or more waypoints the waypoints will automatically scroll as necessary to allow entry of the next waypoint APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 4 7 10 When all of the waypoints have been entered in the flight plan the right outer knob may be rotated to move the cursor up and down and manually scroll through the waypoints making up this flight plan This is useful if the flight plan contains four or more waypoints since not all of the waypoints can be displayed at one time When the right outer knob is rotated counterclockwise the cursor may be positioned over Use If there are more than three waypoints in the flight plan the first two waypoints will then be displayed followed by the last waypoint in the flight plan Rotate the right outer knob to move the cursor and manually scroll to see the missing intermediate waypoints 11 Turn off the cursor lesr Additional flight plans may now be created in the same manner 4 3 y 1910207 gt cD co U N
103. C interface kit to adapt the interface cable s connector to the computer s connector 2 f you are using the PC interface kit in the cockpit plug the other end of the interface cable 4 conductor male connector into the data loader jack that is mounted in the aircraft panel 3 Insert the diskette into the computer s disk drive Turn on the computer being used for the data base update The program on the disk will automatically boot load and the computer screen will display Heady when the computer is ready to continue with the data base update operation 4 Turn on the KLN 89 B Press as required to approve the Self Test Initialization and Data Base pages Use the right outer knob to select the Setup SET type pages and the right inner 2 6 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Data Base knob to select the SET 3 page figure 2 2 NOTE The database key is shown on the SET 3 page for ORS 02 soft VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET ware only Figure 2 2 5 Press cask Update Pub DB will now be flashing as in figure 2 3 6 Press Let The estimated load time in minutes is now displayed figure 2 4 Figure 2 3 2 2 x 7 VOR NDB INT USR NAV FPL CAL SET c 194020 eL rmja D UJ 9 e L1 NOTE step 6 repeatedly pressing will terminate the update process and bring the display back to the orig inal SET 3 page shown in figure oe VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET Figure 2 4
104. CAUT Danger Area DNGR Military Operations Area MOA Prohibited Area PROH Restricted Area REST 3 29 C D T Lam ad 00121900 49 218 9 d N e A ca c p re a lt basic GPS Operation Training Area TRNG Warning Area WARN Terminal Radar Service Area TRSA The nearest special use airspace fea ture is constantly keeping track of the five nearest areas of SUA Pressing the button and selecting the SUA option will display the SUA 1 page for APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH the nearest SUA to your location Figure 3 93 including those which you are inside figure 3 93 Turn to section 3 17 to learn more about how an alti tude input affects special use airspace sensing and how the KLN 89 B determines if you are inside special use airspace or not The SUA 1 page displays the following information Line 1 The name of the special use airspace area Line 2 The SUA type see the list of abbreviations above this particular SUA is Class B airspace and the sequence number 1st nearest 2nd nearest etc Line 3 The altitude limits of the SUA Line 4 The proximity of the nearest point on the border of the SUA in the form of the absolute bearing relative bearing and distance to the SUA border The absolute bearing is the approximate heading you would fly to most quickly get into the SUA The relative bearing arrow in the
105. CH INSTALLATIONS OF KLN 89B OPTIONAL 2 8 z 4p Z w 7 S N oh 7 wy BTN s gt KI 525A AUTOPILOT KA 92 GPS ANTENNA AIRCRAFT lt gt LEFT RIGHT D BAR BENDIX KING KLN 89 TSO APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH act ME west oss o ENT REMOTE MANAGEMENT ANNUNCIATORS SYSTEM REMOTE SWITCH ANNUNCIATOR y MOVING MAP DISPLAYS saydeyg SETTLED S 1 0 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide System Components 1 KLN 89 B SYSTEM COMPONENTS A basic KLN 89 B system consists of a panel mounted KLN 89 B GPS and a KA 92 GPS antenna An altitude input is required to obtain full navigation and operational capabilities Additional system components may be added or interfaced to the KLN 89 B which increase its features and capabilities Some of these optional compo nents include an external course deviation indicator CDI or horizontal situation indicator HSI autopilot and external annuncia tors Typically an altitude input an external indicator and external annunciators are required for IFR approach certification The KLN 89 B panel mounted unit contains the GPS sensor the navigation computer a Gas Plasma Discharge Display and all con trols required to operate the unit It also includes the data base card which slides into the left side of the front panel The KA 92 GPS patch antenna is available for use with the KLN 89 B
106. CT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 3 19 EE N 4 A ca oD eet a Be lt basic GPS Operation 3 Once you have entered the complete identifier press eJ The display will change to the waypoint page for the waypoint you entered figure 3 65 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 3 65 4 If this is the waypoint you intended MS to enter press again The display will change back to the SET 1 page NOTE As an alternative you can also enter the approximate latitude and longitude of your present position directly on the SET 1 page instead of entering a waypoint 5 With the right inner knob position the cursor over Ok if it is not already there figure 3 66 6 Press to approve the initial APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH position The cursor will Figure 3 66 automatically be removed from the Screen NOTE If the KLN 89 B is in the Take Home mode you are allowed to enter the groundspeed kt and head ing 9 fields in order to simulate flight figure 3 67 They are not used for actual initialization in an aircraft Figure 3 67 However entering a ground speed will allow the KLN 89 B to fly along the active flight plan or to a direct to waypoint starting from the initialization waypoint A heading may be entered in the initial heading field while in the Take Home mode if the one offered is not desired See section 4 11 fo
107. D GPS OPERATION 4 1 4 1 Creating and Modifying Flight Plans 4 1 4 1 1 Creating a Flight Plan 4 1 4 1 2 Viewing Distance and Desired Track Between Stored Flight Plan Waypoints 4 4 4 1 3 Activating a Numbered Flight Plan 4 4 4 1 4 Adding a Waypoint to a Flight Plan 4 5 4 1 5 Deleting a Waypoint from a Flight Plan 4 6 4 1 6 Deleting Flight Plans 4 7 4 1 7 Storing FPL 0 as a Numbered Flight Plan 4 7 4 2 Operating from the Active Flight Plan 4 8 4 2 1 General Procedures 4 8 4 2 2 Turn Anticipation and Waypoint Alerting 4 9 4 2 3 Viewing the Waypoint Pages for the Active Flight Plan Waypoints 4 11 4 2 4 Combining Direct To and Flight Plan Operation 4 11 4 2 5 Viewing Distance ETE ETA or Desired Track to Flight Plan Waypoints 4 13 4 3 Altitude Alerting 4 14 4 4 Advisory VNAV Operation 4 17 4 4 1 VNAV for Direct To Operation 4 17 4 4 2 VNAV for Flight Plan Operation
108. Flying non precision approaches using the KLN 89B are not in them selves very difficult However it is different than using traditional equipment such as VORs and NDBs With this in mind make sure that you practice with the KLN 89B in VFR weather with a check pilot before attempting to use the KLN 89B in actual IFR conditions CAUTION The KLN 89B obtains approach information from the data base Therefore it is extremely important that the data base is current The KLN 89B is approved for IFR non precision approaches only when the data base is current If you attempt to select an approach when the data base is out of date you will be given the status line message D Base Expire in the bottom left portion of the screen as a reminder The following sections assume that your KLN 89B is properly installed in the aircraft with all of the necessary accessories to fly non precision approaches In most cases this will mean that the air craft has external switch annunciators to arm the approach mode An external annunciator to indicate when a message is active and when waypoint Sequencing is about to occur will also be installed In some installations the aircraft will have a NAV GPS switch to select which navigation source is displayed on the primary HSI or CDI The NAV 4 page has been specifically designed to provide most of the functions needed for non precision approaches This page pro vides an interface that presents pertinent navigation
109. HENYANG SHN SHANNON SHW SHANWICK OCEANIC SIM SIMFEROPOL SIN SINGAPORE SJU SAN JUAN OCEANIC SKO SKOPJE SLC SALT LAKE CITY SLK SALEKHARD SM SANTA MARIA OCEANIC SMR SAMARKAND SNA SANAA SOF SOFIA SON SONDRESTROM STA STAVANGER STO STOCKHOLM SUK SUKHUMI SUN SUNDSVALL SUR SURGUT SWI SWITZERLAND SYD SYDNEY SYK SYKTYVKAR SYM SEYMCHAN TAE TAEGU TAH TAHITI OCEANIC TAI TAIPEI TAL TALLINN DL TAS TASHKENT E TAZ TASHAUZ TBILISI TEH TEHRAN TEL TEL AVIV TIK TIKSI TIL TILICHIKI TIR TIRANA TOK TOKYO TOR TORONTO TRI TRIPOLI D 15 sa es a gt o c a2 Appendix ARTCC ABBREVIATIONS Cont d TRO TUN TUR TYU UFA UJU ULA UND URA URU VAN VAR VEL VIE VIL VLA VLO VNT VOL VRK WAR WAS WEL WIN WND WUH YAK YAN YEK YEN TRONDHEIM TUNIS TURUKHANSK TYUMEN UFA UJUNG PANDANG ULAANBAATAR UNDERHAAN URALSK URUMQI VANCOUVER VARNA VELIKIYE LUKI VIENNA VILNIUS VLADIVOSTOK VOLOGDA VIENTIANE VOLGOGRAD VORKUTA WARSAW WASHINGTON WELLINGTON WINNIPEG WINDHOEK WUHAN YAKUTSK YANGON YEKATERINBURG YENISEYSK YEREVAN YUZHNO SAKHALINSK ZAGREB ZHEZKAZGAN ZHYGANSK ZURICH ZYRYANKA D 16 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Appendix OTHER ABBREVIATIONS USED ON KLN 89 B PAGES A Airport waypoint A C Aircraft ACQ Acquisition ACT Active flight plan waypoints ADJ Adjust AKD Alaska Daylight Time AKS Alaska Standar
110. INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 3 167 4 Press to approve each line of remarks The cursor will automatically move to the next line see figure 3 168 lt 5 Turn the cursor off when you are APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH finished creating the remark Figure 3 168 The Other 5 OTH 5 page is a list of waypoints with associated remarks Sometimes these are deleted if there are more than 100 waypoints with remarks or if the remarks are no longer relevant lf you wish to delete a waypoint remark for a user defined waypoint see section 3 14 2 3 57 co gt a Og e G co Basic GPS Operation 3 12 ALTITUDE PAGES The ALT altitude pages are used to control and display most of the altitude related functions of the KLN 89 B including minimum safe alti tudes and vertical navigation VNAV The ALT pages are accessed by pressing the button The first time the button is pressed the ALT 1 page is displayed figure 3 169 If the button is pressed again while the ALT 1 page is dis played the display changes to the ALT 2 page Pressing a third time goes back to the page which you were on before you changed to the pages Figure 3 169 NOTE For a detailed discussion of the ALT 2 page see section 4 4 Advisory VNAV Operation The ALT 1 page is used to set the current barometric pressure or baro setting Since all encoding altimete
111. KHABAD ASM ASMARA AST ASTRAKHAN ASU ASUNCION ATF ANTOFAGASTA ATH ATHENS ATL ATLANTA ATY ATYRAU AUC AUCKLAND OCEANIC AUC AUKLAND BAG BAGHDAD BAH BAHRAIN BAK BAKU BAL BALI BAN BANGKOK D 8 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Appendix ARTCC ABBREVIATIONS Cont d BAR BARCELONA BAT BATAGAY BEI BEIJING BEL BELEM BER BERMUDA BIA BIAK BIS BISHKEK BLA BLAGOVESHCHENSK BLG BELGRADE BLO BLOEMFONTEIN BOD BODO BOD BODO OCEANIC BOG BOGOTA BOM BOMBAY BOR BORDEAUX BOS BOSTON BRA BEIRA BRD BRINDISI BRE BREMEN BRI BRISBANE BRL BERLIN BRN BARNAUL BRR BARRANQUILLA BRS BRASILIA UTA BRT BEIRUT BRU BRUSSELS BRV BRATISLAVA BRY BERYOZOVO P BRZ BRAZZAVILLE Sz BSK BRATSK E BST BREST BUC BUCHAREST BUD BUDAPEST BUJ BUJUMBURA CAI CAIRO CAL CALCUTTA CAM CAMPO GRANDE CAM CENTRAL AMERICA CAN CANARIES CAP CAPE TOWN D 9 Appendix ARTCC ABBREVIATIONS Cont d CAS CASABLANCA CHA CHAYBUKHA CHE CHELYABINSK CHI CHICAGO CHO CHOKURDAKH CHR CHERSKY CHT CHITA CHU CHULMAN CLE CLEVELAND COC COCOS COL COLOMBO COM COMODORO RIVIADAVIA COP COPENHAGEN COR CORDOBA CRT CURITIBA CUR CURACAO DAK DAKAR DAK DAKAR OCEANIC DAM DAMASCUS DAR DARWIN DEL DELHI DEN DENVER DES DAR ES SALAAM DHA DHAKA DIK DIKSON DOR DORNOD DSS DUSSELDORF sa DUR DURBAN s DUS DUSHANBE Eu EDM EDMONTON lt EMIRATES ENT ENTEBBE EZE EZEIZA FRA FRANKFURT FW FT WORTH GAB GABORONE GAN G
112. KLN 89 KLN 89B Bendix King GPS Navigation Systems ORS 01 02 Honeywell WARNING Prior to export of this document review for export license requirement is needed COPYRIGHT NOTICE Copyright 1997 2002 Honeywell International Inc All rights reserved Reproduction of this publication or any portion thereof by any means without the express written permission of Honeywell International Inc is prohibited For fur ther information contact the Manager Technical Publications Honeywell One Technology Center 23500 West 105th Street Olathe Kansas 66061 Telephone 913 782 0400 KLN 89 89B Pilot s Guide 006 08 786 0000 for KLN 89 KLN 89B with Operational Revision Status ORS 01 and 02 IMPORTANT Special installation procedures must be followed in order for the KLN 89B to be certified for IFR En route Terminal and Non precision Approach use If these procedures are followed the KLN 89B can be used for IFR use Consult the KLN 89B Flight Manual Supplement for the operating limitations of this unit oeptember 2002 IMPORTANT This Pilots Guide covers both the KLN 89 VFR only and KLN 89B IFR approved for Enroute Terminal and Non precision Approach phases of flight There are numerous places throughout this guide which discuss features and operational characteristics which specifically apply to KLN 89B and not to KLN 89 These parts of the Pilot s Guide refer specifically to 89B and often are mark
113. KLN 89B is in the approach active mode ACTV on external annunciator 6 Fly to the Missed Approach Point position E in figure 5 1 The KLN 89B will not automatically sequence to the next waypoint You must manually change to the appropriate waypoint accord ing to the situation By default the KLN 89B will nominate the first waypoint of the published missed approach procedure when is pressed and the active waypoint is the MAP and you have flown past the MAP rule number 4 in section 3 9 If necessary conduct the missed approach procedure Remember to always refer to the paper chart when conducting a missed approach The OBS mode is usually needed at some point during a missed approach and is always required to fly the holding pattern position F in figure 5 1 The details of the above operations as well as several examples of how to conduct non precision approaches using the KLN 89B are given in the following sections 5 4 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Approaches and SID STARs 5 1 1 SELECTING AN APPROACH The first item in the list from the previous section is to select and load the approach into the active flight plan Approaches are selected from the APT 8 or ACT 8 page of the airport for which you desire to shoot the approach If you are operating from a flight plan the easi est way to get to the approach information is by turning to the ACT page for your destination as described in section 4 2 3 The following ex
114. King KLN 89 or KLN 89B GPS Celestial navigation will now be a way of life for you The phe nomenal accuracy of GPS along with the KLN 89 B s user friendly operation and graphics display will make flying a delight Not only will the KLN 89 B help you to navigate more easily and more accurately its trip planning features air data calculations and other useful fea tures will make you feel like you re flying with a true flight management system In addition KLN 89B may be IFR approved for En route Terminal and Non precision Approach operations We think you ll find that having an abundance of navigational data not to mention a moving map available to you will make non precision approaches more pre cise and more enjoyable This Pilot s Guide will be of great help to you It is written in plain simple English and it assumes you are not an experienced user of GPS or other type of long range navigation equipment If you are experienced so much the better This Pilot s Guide also includes hundreds of sample screen figures and other illustrations to make your learning easier It is designed so that you can start at the front and progress in the order presented however you may want to skip around and learn things in your own order Also on page iv there is an index of frequently used procedures which will help you find the page that describes how to do exactly what you want to do There are also several appendices in the back of the manua
115. L 0 The standard procedure is to create a flight plan using one of the flight plans numbered as FPL 1 FPL 2 etc When one of these numbered flight plans is activated it becomes FPL 0 the active flight plan This Pilot s Guide will refer to FPL 0 as the active flight plan and FPL 1 through FPL 25 as the numbered flight plans If desired a flight plan can be created directly in the active flight plan This avoids creating the flight plan in a numbered flight plan and then having to activate it The disadvantage is that if a numbered flight plan is subsequently made active the one programmed directly into FPL 0 will be lost e Modifications may be made to FPL 0 without affecting the way it is stored as a numbered flight plan e Unless Direct To operation is being used the active flight plan FPL 0 must contain at least two waypoints Otherwise the KLN 89 B navigation system will be flagged 4 1 1 CREATING A FLIGHT PLAN A flight plan for a flight from Lakefront airport in New Orleans LA to ot Petersburg Clearwater FL International airport will be used as an example of how to create a flight plan The waypoints making up the flight plan are KNEW Lakefront airport GPT Gulfport VOR Sul Semmes VOR CEW Crestview VOR MAI Marianna VOR TLH Tallahassee VOR CTY Cross City VOR and KPIE St Petersburg Clearwater International airport 4 y 1910207 gt C U N
116. L 240 R or at assigned lower altitude flight level w ra bu WA N 2 FELLOWS Tom m 117 1 AVE N35 05 6 wing 51 9 NAVI GEV FEO M She Approaches and SID STARs EJ S N FRANCISCO CALIF SAN FRANCISCO INTL Rwys 19L R departures turn LEFT as soon as practicable due to steeply rising terrain to 2000 immediately south of airport Proceed via OAK R 135 to cross the OAK 25 DME fix at or above 9000 Cross Wages Int at or above FL 200 or at assigned LOWER altitude flight level Thence via transition or assigned route Expect further clearance to filed altitude 10 minutes after departure Rwys 28L R Intercept and proceed via SFO R 281 cross the 6 DME fix at or above 2500 then turn LEFT to a 180 heading to intercept and proceed via PYE R 135 to cross Porte Int at or above 9000 and Pesca Int at or above 13000 Then turn LEFT to a 090 heading to intercept and proceed via OSI R 116 to cross Wages Int at or above FL 200 or at assigned LOWER altitude flight level Thence via tran sition or assigned route Expect further clearance to filed altitude 10 minutes after departure When SFO VOR is inoperative Rwy 28 departures Expect radar vectors to PYE R 135 then resume SID TRANSITIONS AVE VOR Via OSI R 116 and AVE R 298 Cross OSI R 116 60 DME fix at or above FL 240 or at assigned LOWER altitude flight level CZQ VOR Via CZO R 259 FLW VOR Via FLW R
117. M 6 Press again to approve the waypoint page figure 4 18 7 Turn off the cursor e sn APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 4 18 4 1 5 DELETING A WAYPOINT FROM A FLIGHT PLAN To delete a waypoint from a flight plan 1 Press to enable the cursor if it is not on already 2 Move the cursor over the waypoint you wish to delete a 2 M S figure 4 19 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET e Press Car The letters Del Figure 4 19 yu delete will appear to the left of os the identifier and a question mark 5 will appear to the right of the 3 407 identifier figure 4 20 If a mis take was made and you do not CE wish to delete this waypoint Figure 4 20 press e 4 Press and the waypoint will be deleted from the flight plan The other waypoints in the flight plan will be correctly repositioned figure 4 21 Figure 4 21 5 Turn off the cursor ensn APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET 4 6 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Advanced GPS Operation 4 1 6 DELETING FLIGHT PLANS To delete a flight plan which is no longer required 1 Display the flight plan FPL 0 FPL 1 or FPL 25 which is to be cleared figure 4 22 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 4 22 2 Make sure that the cursor is turned off and use the button if it is not 3 Press Pun The words Delete FPL will appear at the top of the
118. N WAYPOINTS The waypoint pages for each of the waypoints in the active flight plan may be easily displayed by selecting the Active ACT Waypoint page type ser von Noe INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH When the ACT page type is first selected the waypoint page for the active waypoint will be displayed fig ure 4 38 The location of the waypoint in the flight plan waypoint 1 waypoint 2 etc is annunciated with a number to the left of the identifier In addition an arrow to the Figure 4 39 left of the waypoint number designates the active waypoint If there is a letter to the far right of the identifier it designates the type of way point intersection U user defined waypoint If the waypoint is an airport the airport elevation is displayed here If the waypoint is a VOR or an NDB the navaid APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH frequency is displayed in this area U figure 4 39 J dee To view the waypoints in the flight plan that are not the active way point APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 1 Pull the right inner knob to the Fi 441 out position and turn it to view gur each of the rest of the waypoints in the order they are contained in the flight plan figure 4 40 y 1e1deu 2 Once the desired waypoint is found the right inner knob may be pushed back to the in position and rotated to display any of the other waypoi
119. P Mee liters L or kilograms KG If you wish to manually set the FOB use the right outer knob to move the cursor to line 2 and use the right inner knob to select the desired value Another option is to move the cursor to Full and press which will update the FOB to the tanks full value set at the time of installation To go on move the cursor to Ok and press A waypoint page for the waypoint which was active when the KLN 89 B was last turned off will be displayed on the screen If the last active waypoint was an airport the APT 5 page showing the airport s communications frequencies will be displayed figure 3 22 We thought you d like that Almost always the waypoint which was active when you last turned the KLN 89 B off is the airport where you landed Therefore Figure 3 22 when you get ready to depart the airport communication frequencies for that airport will automatically be displayed for you 3 7 e D T Lam ad Ln 1 001321900 490 218 9 gt Og e gt co Basic GPS Operation Next you ll probably want to check the NAV 2 page to see your present position Use the right outer knob to select the NAV page type and then the right inner knob if necessary to select the NAV 2 page It is quite likely that the present position will be dashed at first figure 3 23 It takes the KLN 89 B a couple of minutes
120. Press to load the active flight plan into this numbered flight plan figure 4 27 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 4 27 4 2 OPERATING FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN 4 2 1 GENERAL PROCEDURES Everything you have learned in this Pilot s Guide thus far is applicable to using the KLN 89 B for flight plan operation The following rules and considerations apply for flight plan operation while the KLN 89 B is in the Leg mode Always verify that you are viewing the active flight plan page FPL 0 and not one of the other numbered flight plan pages The active leg of the flight plan is designated with a symbol A leg is defined as the course line between a pair of waypoint a from waypoint and a to waypoint The head of the arrow is positioned to the left of and points to the active to waypoint In figure 4 28 SLC Salt Lake City VOR is the to waypoint The tail of the symbol is positioned to the left of the from way point KPVU Provo Municipal is the from waypoint in figure 4 28 The amp symbol is not dis played unless the KLN 89 B is actually receiving GPS signals suitable for navigation Note the unit IS in the take home mode APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH it has been tricked into thinking Figure 4 28 it is receiving signals and there fore the symbol be displayed Also the symbol will not be displayed if Direct To navigation i
121. Published Power Radial Receiver Reference Required Reserve fuel South Supplemental waypoint Samoa Daylight Time Setup D 18 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Appendix OTHER ABBREVIATIONS Cont d SNR Signal to noise ratio SST Samoa Standard Time SUP Supplemental SV Space vehicle SW Software TK Actual track TOT Total U User defined waypoint USR User defined waypoint UTC Coordinated Universal Time Zulu V VOR waypoint W West WPT Waypoint Z Zulu time gt lt a SuOIeiAaJqqy D 19 Appendix This page intentionally left blank sa ot t gt o 2 s D 20 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Appendix APPENDIX E LAT LON CONVERSIONS The KLN 89 B utilizes latitude and longitude expressed in degrees minutes and hundredths of a minute You may occasionally see a document expressing latitude and longitude in degrees minutes and seconds This table may be used to convert seconds to hundredths of a minute SECONDS HUNDREDTHS OF A MINUTE 00 00 01 02 02 03 03 05 04 07 05 08 06 10 07 12 08 13 09 15 10 17 11 18 12 20 13 22 14 23 15 25 16 27 17 28 18 30 19 32 20 33 21 35 22 37 23 38 24 40 25 42 26 43 27 45 28 47 29 48 30 90 31 02 32 53 1 gt lt rn SU0ISI Au09 UOTE Appendix LAT LON CONVERSIONS Cont d SECONDS HUNDREDTHS OF A MINUTE 33 55 34 5
122. R DATA PAGES opecific models of Shadin Company air data systems may be interfaced to the KLN 89 B When interfaced with one Figure 4 138 of these systems the KLN 89 B will display real time air data parame ters such as true airspeed TAS static air temperature SAT total air temperature TAT Mach number density altitude and pressure altitude With a TAS input from an air data computer and a compatible heading input the KLN 89 B will calculate and display real time wind data mag nitude and direction NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL 4 44 KLN 89 B Pilot s Guide Advanced GPS Operation NOTE Heading information inputs to the KLN 89 B must be in a format which is different than available from most mechanical compass sys tems including the Bendix King KCS 55A KI 525A HSI with bootstrap heading synchro and KCS 305 compass systems However the com patible Shadin air data system will convert three wire analog heading information from these mechanical systems into the proper format The Other 11 and Other 12 OTH 11 and OTH 12 pages are used to display air data information if both a fuel management system and an air data system are interfaced to the KLN 89 B If there is no fuel manage ment system air data information is displayed on the Other 7 and Other 8 pages If there is no air data system interface these pages are not dis played NOTE These air data pages receive inputs from air data sensors and display real t
123. SER Waypoint Pages 3 56 3 11 5 1 The User 0 USR 0 3 56 3 11 5 2 The User 1 USR 1 3 56 3 11 5 3 The User 2 USR 2 3 56 3 11 5 4 The User 3 USR 3 57 9312 Allitiide PAGES edet eoe Dated da aa tante 3 58 3 13 Viewing and Setting the Date and Time 3 60 9 14 The Other OTH Pages u u uuu u dm u uuu 3 62 3 14 1 Determining the Status of the GPS Signals 3 62 TOC 2 KLNS9 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Table of Contents 3 14 2 Viewing and Deleting User Waypoints and Waypoint Remarks 3 64 3 14 2 1 The OTH 4 3 65 3 14 2 2 The OTH 5 3 65 3 14 3 Viewing the KLN 89 B Software Status the OTH 6 page 3 66 3 15 Remote Mounted Annunciators 3 66 3 16 Avionics Bus Voltage Alerting 3 67 3 17 Special Use Airspace Alerting 3 68 9 10 SAMPE TID earum K D ua tua eee 3 71 3 18 1 Pre departure 3 71 32 8 2 Enroul Ee b e MV 3 72 3 18 3 Terminal Area eese 3 73 4 ADVANCE
124. STAR into a flight plan other than FPL 0 Furthermore SID and STAR procedures are deleted from FPL 0 after the power is off for more than 5 minutes 5 2 3 EDITING A SID OR STAR From the proceeding two examples you may have noticed that SID and STAR procedures have procedure headers just as approaches do It is possible to use these headers to delete and change the entire procedure just like is done with approach procedures One dif ference between SID and STAR procedures and approaches is that it is possible to add waypoints to and delete waypoints from the pub Chapter 5 N er d o cO a e a a p 5 32 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Approaches and SID STARs lished procedure To help you differentiate between approaches no adding or deleting waypoints allowed and SID or STAR procedures adding and deleting waypoints allowed the waypoint number has a period next to it instead of a blank space The period also differen tiates a SID or STAR waypoint from a regular waypoint that has a colon next to the waypoint number To add an individual waypoint in the SID or STAR procedure 1 Use the right knobs to select the FPL 0 page 2 Turn the cursor on by pressing the cask Rotate the right outer knob as necessary to position the cursor over the waypoint iden tifier which you desire to follow the waypoint being added 3 Use the right inner and outer kn
125. T NAV FPL S s ot angle down to the tenth of a Figure 4 116 z degree figure 4 117 a 10 Press to approve the radial 7 g The cursor will move to line 4 S z 11 Use the right Inner and outer VOR NDB USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH knobs to select the desired dis Figure 4 117 tance from the reference waypoint figure 4 118 12 Press to approve the dis tance The cursor will automatically be removed from the screen Figure 4 118 VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL 4 34 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Advanced GPS Operation 4 7 NAVIGATION MODES The KLN 89 B allows you to choose how the course to the active waypoint is defined This is done by selecting between the two course modes LEG and OBS The LEG mode means that the course to the active waypoint is selected by the KLN 89 B and is the default mode when the KLN 89 B starts up The other course mode OBS is the mode that allows you to select the course to or from the active waypoint In this mode the KLN 89 B operates very much like a VOR receiver This is the mode that you will use quite often if you conduct any non precision approaches using the KLN 89B The KLN 89B also has three modes that are associated with approach operations These are Enroute Approach Arm and Approach Active These modes will be explained in Chapter 5 Figure 4 119 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH The course mode is annunciated on the lef
126. TH the annunciation to alternate Figure 4 126 between DIRECT TO and ACTI VATE Make sure ACTIVATE is displayed A 2 d id 2 gt lt a gt If the desired waypoint is not the one that was suggested by the KLN 89 B enter the desired iden tifier Press mr Figure 4 127 4 Press to approve the waypoint page and activate the waypoint figure 4 127 The selected course does not change therefore this method does not center the D Bar like a Direct To operation does APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 4 7 8 CHANGING THE CDI SCALE FACTOR The CDI scale factor can be changed by using the NAV 1 page In nor mal operations it is possible to select a CDI scale factor which is plus or minus 5 NM 1 NM or 0 3 NM full scale deflection This means that if the scale factor was 1 NM and the needle was deflected full scale to the right the aircraft would be 1 NM left of course The default CDI scale factor is 5 NM Chapter 4 To change the CDI scale factor 1 Select the NAV 1 page 2 Turn on the cursor c5 It will appear over the second line of the NAV 1 page which usually dis plays the course deviation indicator figure 4 1 28 This is a cyclic field APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH as indicated by the carat gt pre Figure 4 128 ceding it p A e ou C e ca 4 40 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Advanced GPS Operatio
127. There are some SID STAR procedures in the world that are not suited for the operational characteristics of the KLN 89B These procedures are not included in the data base and therefore the way points that make up these procedures would have to be entered manually It is good preflight practice ensure that the KLN 89B con tains anticipated procedures for the flight SID and STAR procedures are stored with the airport for which they apply SID and STAR procedures are accessed through the APT 7 page lf there are both SIDs and STARs for a given airport then there will be two APT 7 pages one to select a SID and the other to select a STAR This is indicated by APT 7 It is also possible to have only a SID or only a STAR in which case there is only one APT 7 page 5 29 13 dey9 gt 9 e cD 9 2 e gt c gt JJ Chapter 5 N er d o a e a a e p Approaches and SID STARs SID and STAR procedures are defined in three parts The parts are the SID or STAR name e g PORTES a transition e g Fellows and a runway specific component e g RW 01L The APT 7 pages lead you through the selection process 5 2 1 SELECTING A SID Use the following procedure to select a SID Some steps may not be necessary depending on the procedure that you wish to fly For this example the PORTE NINE departure from San Franc
128. To waypoint the arrow preceding the waypoint identifier on the waypoint page for the active waypoint will begin flashing This arrow will also be flashing on any NAV or FPL page displaying the active waypoint identifier This is called waypoint alerting If an external waypoint alert WPT annunciator is mounted in the aircraft this annunciator will begin flashing at the same time 3 35 e D T Lom ad 00121900 49 218 9 gt Og e gt co Basic GPS Operation 3 10 NAVIGATION PAGES As you would expect the NAV navigation pages contain information relating specifically to the KLN 89 B s navigation capabilities The KLN 89 B has four NAV pages The procedure for selecting specific pages including the NAV pages was described in section 3 4 1 Page Selection 3 10 1 THE NAVIGATION 1 NAV 1 PAGE The NAV 1 page is the primary navigation display and is shown in figure 3 110 In normal flight you will probably rely on this page quite a lot A NAV 1 page displays the following information Figure 3 110 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Line 1 The active navigation leg For Direct To operation this con sists of the Direct To symbol followed by the active Direct To waypoint identifier figure 3 110 For the leg of a flight plan this consists of the from waypoint identifier and the active to
129. Waypoint page appears on the screen The Duplicate Waypoint page is used to select which of the waypoints having the same identifier is actually desired The waypoint identifier is displayed on the top left of the page To the right of the identifier is the number of waypoints in the data base having the identifier Below the identifier is a list of the waypoint 3 15 C D T Lam ad 00121900 49 218 9 co gt gt Og 2 e G co Basic GPS Operation types APT VOR NDB INT USR and the associated countries which use the identifier To see an example of a Duplicate Waypoint page try entering the identifier D as a Direct To waypoint or a Flight Plan Waypoint 1 Press gt J Select the letter D as the waypoint identifier figure 3 51 D is the full identifier of Several waypoints in the KLN 89 B data Figure 3 51 base Press wr The Duplicate Waypoint page will be displayed on the screen figure 3 52 At the time of this writing there were E VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH three waypoints in the Americas E data base having the identifier D If there are more than four waypoints having the same identifier only the first three are initially shown The list includes an NDB in Canada an NDB in Cuba and an NDB in the U S The cursor will be over the first waypoint listed They are listed w
130. a c c 7 0 Appendix Magnetic Var for Published Approach Being Used This message appears when a user defined magnetic variation has been selected on the SET 2 page and an approach waypoint is active The KLN 89B will use the magnetic varia tiion association with the approach waypoint Magnetic Var Invalid Nav Data Referenced To True North This message appears when the magnetic variation is invalid due to operation outside of the data base magnetic variation area without having a pilot entered magnetic variation See section 4 10 Mag Var for Published VOR Being Used This message appears when a user defined magnet ic variation has been selected on the SET 2 page the unit is in OBS mode and the active waypoint is a VOR In this case the magnetic varia tion asociated with the VOR station will be used MSG Annunciator Fail This message appears when there is a failure of the KLN 89 B MSG annunciator drive circuitry To determine if there are any messages to be viewed you will need to look at the KLN 89 B display because the annunciator will not be working if this message has been given Service the KLN 89 B as soon as possible Nav Data Referenced To True North This message appears when a user defined magnetic variation of O degrees is being used for navigation data Nav Data Referenced To User Defined Mag Var This message appears when a user defined magnetic vari
131. ach will be used and the follwing message will be displayed Mag Var for Published Approach Being Used Also when the unit is in the OBS mode and the active waypoint is a VOR the magnetic variation associated with the VOR station willl be used and the following message will be displayed Mag Var for Published VOR Being Used NOTE A user entered magnetic variation will not be retained if power Is off for more than 5 minutes Use of automatically computed magnetic variation will be restored if power is off for more than 5 minutes and the unit is within the primary coverage area To enter the local magnetic variation manually on the SET 2 page 1 Tum on the cursor ensn 2 Move the cursor over the numerical field online 4 figure 4 142 3 Press the button to toggle the magnetic variation cycles field from automatic to manual if required ORS 02 only figure 4 143 4 Use the right knobs to select the magnetic variation from 0 to 99 degrees Figure 4 143 5 Move the flashing part of the cursor to the E W east west field and select whether the magnetic variation is easterly or westerly figure 4 143 6 Press to approve and turn the cursor css8 off NOTE The above format for the SET 2 page applies to ORS 02 soft ware OHS 01 software only allows the selection of a user entered magnetic variation when the unit is outside of the primary coverage area while ORS 02 software always a
132. age Press GPS APR For NAV This message is telling you to cancel the approach mode by pressing the external switch annunciator This will change the unit to the approach arm mode and navigation information will be restored 5 2 SID STAR PROCEDURES The KLN 89B allows access to navigation SIDs Standard Instrument Departures and STARs Standard Terminal Arrival Routes by SID STAR name SID STAR procedures stored in the data base can only be considered accurate as long as the data base is current Even though the data base contains SID and STAR procedures there is a lot of information that is not included in the data base Therefore the paper chart is still the primary source of information For example many procedures require the aircraft to fly to a certain altitude along a heading until intercepting a course and many other procedures that the KLN 89B can not automatically accomplish Many procedures require pilot action to ensure that the proper path is flown over the ground The main purpose of loading a SID or a STAR into the active flight plan is to provide you with a quick way of loading a potentially large number of waypoints SID and STAR procedures can be as challenging to fly as some approaches are Therefore it is mandatory that you are comfortable with the operation of the KLN 89B before attempting to fly SID and STAR procedures In particular flight plan operation and the OBS mode should be second nature to you NOTE
133. age and turn on the cursor erse If it is possible to enter the present fuel on board by using the KLN 89 B there will be a colon fol lowing Fuel OB on the display If the colon exists press the left figure 4 133 if the colon does not exist it is not possible to change the fuel on board through the KLN APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL 89 B Figure 4 133 Enter the current fuel on board using the right inner knob Make sure the amount entered is consistent with the units used by the fuel flow computer The fuel required to reach the destination waypoint at the current rate of fuel flow and the present groundspeed Fuel Reqd The landing fuel on board Ldg Fuel OB is the fuel presently on board minus the fuel required to reach the destination The second OTH 7 page displays e The desired fuel reserve You may enter here the amount of reserve fuel you wish to have upon landing The fuel must be entered in the same units as displayed on the first line To enter the reserve press the left and use the right inner knob to select the desired value Turn off the when finished The calculated extra fuel This is the landing fuel on board minus the fuel reserve you entered 48 2 THE OTHER 8 OTH 8 PAGE The OTH 8 page displays the following information figure 4 134 The desired fuel reserve Same as displayed on the OTH 7 page Changing the reserve one of Figure 4 134 the two pages also changes it on t
134. airport with no active flight plan 1 Load the approach into the flight plan as described in section 5 1 1 In this case there is only one IAF so the KLN 89B does not present the option for you to select an IAF In this example there is no active flight plan to begin with so the KLN 89B will ask to add the approach to FPL 0 2 Approaching the area ATC tells you to go direct to the TXO VOR and clears you for the approach to KCVN This is easy to do from the NAV 4 page by pulling out on the right inner knob and scanning through the active flight plan by turning the inner knob Once TXO is displayed in the scanning window figure 5 17 gt 2 press and then to initiate 770770 a direct to operation to the TXO Figure 5 17 VOR 3 Atadistance of 4 NM to the TXO VOR the KLN 89B will give the following message If Required Select OBS This message provides a reminder that to fly a course reversal the OBS mode needs to be selected Note from the approach chart that there is a NoPT Arrival Sector for this approach If you are approach ing TXO within the indicated area there is no need to perform a course reversal and you need to ignore this message The NoPT sector is not stored in the data base so it is not possible for the KLN 89B to know if a course reversal is required or not as a result the KLN 89B will always give this message whenever a waypoint could be used for a course reversal The KLN 89B will properly sequence to the FAF to
135. altime ter the present indicated altitude will be displayed on line 2 The bottom line should display Pass and a flashing Ok Press the button to approve the Self test Page 3 The Initialization Page will now be displayed If the date and time are incorrect by more than 10 minutes refer to section 3 2 of this Pilots Guide The right side of the screen should show the identi fier of the nearest airport to the initial position along with a radial and distance from that airport waypoint Press with the cur sor flashing over Ok to approve the Initialization Page 4 f you are using a KLN 89 or your KLN 89B has been configured for VFR use only the VFR page will now be displayed to notify you of the VFR limitation Press to approve this page 5 The Data Base Page is now displayed showing the date the data base expires or the date it expired Press to acknowledge the information displayed on this page KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Introduction The next page displayed will probably be a page showing the VHF communication frequencies for the airport you are at For now use the right outer knob to turn to the NAV page type watch the lower left corner of the screen and the small bar at the bottom to know when you are there Then use the right inner knob to select the NAV 2 page if not already there The NAV 2 page shows your present position relative to a nearby VOR Verify that this position is correct before proceeding Press the bu
136. ample will use the VOR or GPS RWY 25R approach to Los Angeles International airport KLAX To select and load an approach into the active flight plan FPL 0 1 Turn to one of the APT pages and select KLAX by using the cursor inner and outer knobs uuu Wu sI RSS DT figure 5 2 Figure 5 2 2 Use the right inner knob to turn to the APT 8 page If you select ed KLAX from the APT 1 page turn the inner knob one click counter clockwise to reach the APT 8 page 3 Turn the cursor on by pressing es The cursor comes up on the first approach in the list of approaches Use the right outer knob to move the cursor to different approaches figure 5 3 If there are more than 3 approaches to an airport you can move the cur sor down to scroll the other e procedures into view by rotating gt the right outer knob APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 4 With the flashing cursor over Figure 5 3 VOR 25R press 5 The KLN 89B will present a list of Initial Approach Fixes IAFs corresponding to this approach In this example we want the ELMOO P Select this by APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH pressing when the cursor is over ELMOO figure 5 4 Here Note If there is only one IAF for a procedure then the KLN 89B will skip this step and go on to the next step e 5 5 G 1940209 9 e cD 9 2 e gt c gt JJ
137. and the position can not be assured to be within IFR limits for the particular mode of flight Cross check the position of the aircraft with other means of navigation every 15 minutes to verify that the position is still accurate RCVR HW Error Receiver Hardware Error This message appears when the KLN 89 B fails a specific internal test for the GPS receiver The blanks will contain a value which may provide assistance to maintenance personnel B 5 g xipuaddy cD e N c g cD cD e N 9 e cD o Appendix B o a c 7 0 a c c 7 0 Appendix Recycle Power to Use Valid Data Base Data This message appears when the date entered on the Initialization page is before the data base effective date and the date entered later on the SET 2 page is after the data base effective date or vice versa Turn the KLN 89 B off and back on so that the correct data base data is utilized Redundant WPTs In FPL Edit Enroute WPTs As Necessary This message appears after the pilot inserts an approach in the flight plan and the KLN 89B determines that some way points that were in the flight plan are no longer needed Examine the active flight plan and remove those waypoints that occur both in the enroute and the approach sections of the flight plan Timer Expired This message appears when the alarm time on the CAL 3 page is reached User Data Ba
138. ange the active way point to PORTE This is done easily from either the NAV 4 page or from the FPL 0 page In either case once PORTE is highlighted by the cursor press to bring up the direct to page Press to confirm PORTE as the direct to waypoint Change the selected course on the HSI or CDI to the new value of 135 As required by the SID continue flying a heading of 200 until the HSI or CDI needle centers and then fly to keep the needle centered and fly to PORTE 5 34 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide JEPPESEN 29 JAN 93 BAY Departure R 135 This SID requires the following minimum climb gradients for obstacle clearance Rwy 19L 480 per NM to 1400 Rwy 19R CAT A amp B 480 per NM to 1400 CAT C amp D 530 per NM to 1800 Rwy 28L R 300 per NM to 2000 an sases Kts 75 o wo 20 aso sm 13007 per NM 375 7s0 hooo 1250 1500 er sec no aoo an aro os zi 530 per NM 663 ses 177 306 2660 TAKE OFF Rwys 1 L R Intercept and proceed via SFO R 350 cross the 4 OME fix at or above 1600 then turn LEFT to a 200 heading to intercept and proceed via PYE R 135 to cross Porte Int at or above 9000 and Pesca nt at or above 13000 Then turn LEFT to a 090 heading to intercept and proceed via OSI R 116 to cross Wages Int at or above FL 200 or at assigned LOWER altitude flight level Thence via tran sition or assigned route Expect further clearance to filed altitude
139. approach mode No Intcpt No Intercept Appears when an attempt is made to recalcu late the intercept point on a DME arc and the actual track does not intercept with the arc Change the track heading of the aircraft so that the actual track does intercept the DME arc and try again No Nrst No Nearest Appears when the pilot selects a nearest list APT VOR NDB INT USR SUA FSS or CTR and there are no nearest items of that type within a 200 nm radius of the aircraft s pre sent position NoSuch Wpt No Such Waypoint Appears when there is no waypoint in the data base corresponding to the entered identifier on the Supplemental Waypoint page Remrks Full Remarks Full Appears when you attempt to create a user entered Airport or Supplemental Waypoint remark on the APT 6 or SUP 3 page if 100 user entered remarks already exist In order to create additional airport remarks some existing remarks must be deleted on the OTH 4 page Used In Fpl Used in Flight Plan Appears when you attempt to delete a user defined waypoint on the OTH 4 page if the waypoint is used in a flight plan Either this waypoint must be deleted from the flight plan or the entire flight plan must be deleted before this waypoint can be deleted from the user defined waypoint list USR DB Full User Data Base Full Appears when you attempt to create a user defined waypoint if the user data base already contains 500 waypoints In o
140. are navigating with a flight plan see section 4 2 the NAV 4 page displays the waypoints of the active flight plan FPL 0 with their waypoint identifiers figure 3 125 Course lines connect the flight plan waypoints When operating Direct To a waypoint which is not in the active flight plan the direct to waypoint is shown on the APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH map and although the waypoints of the active flight plan are still shown on the screen they are not connected by course lines figure 3 126 In the lower left corner of the map dis play area is the map range scale in nautical miles The range scale indi cates the distance from the aircraft s position to the top of the Screen You APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH may select a range scale of 1 NM to f 500 NM 2 km to 925 km with several AGUEA choices in between by turning on the cursor lesr and using the right inner knob to select the desired range scale For example figure 3 127 illustrates the results of changing the range scale of the map in figure 3 126 from 60 nautical miles to 30 nautical miles Additionally there is a choice called AUTO for automatic range scal ing This choice is sandwiched between the 1 NM 2 km scale and the 500 NM 925 km scale such that it is below 1 NM 2 km and above 500 NM 925 km The AUTO scale factor feature zooms the map in and out in a useful way so that you don t have to opecifical
141. arest airport criteria 1 Select the SET 6 page and turn on the cursor csss 2 Use the right inner knob to select the minimum length runway desired for the airport to qualify for the nearest airport list figure 3 91 Values between 1000 feet and 5000 feet or between 300m Figure 3 91 and 1500m in 100 foot or meter increments may be selected 3 Rotate the right outer knob clockwise to move the cursor over the runway surface criteria 4 Turn the right inner knob to select either HRD or ANY If ANY is chosen then both hard and soft surface runways meeting the required runway length will be included in the nearest airport list If HRD is chosen then only hard surface runways will be includ ed Hard surface runways include concrete asphalt pavement tarmac brick bitumen and sealed Soft surface runways include turf gravel clay sand dirt ice steel matting shale and snow For example if the minimum runway criteria selected is 2200 feet in length and HRD surface then only airport having a hard surface runway at least 2200 feet in length will be displayed in the nearest airport list 3 28 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation 3 8 1 2 Continuous Display of Nearest Airport When the nearest airport page is initially displayed 1 is displayed in the upper right hand corner of the page to designate this airport as the nearest airport However if you continue to fly along yo
142. arm activates as follows Ms feet prior to reaching the selected altitude three short ones Upon reaching the selected altitude two short tones Deviating above or below the selected altitude by more than the warn altitude four short tones NOTE Due to the resolution of the altitude input it may be neces sary to descend slightly below or climb slightly above the selected altitude before the two tones are activated indicating that the selected altitude has been reached This selected altitude alert must be activated to arm the system for providing the altitude deviation alert The KLN 89 B can provide the aural alarm tones in either of two ways it may be connected to an audio input of an audio amplifier contained in an audio panel so that the aural alarm is heard through the aircraft s speaker and headphones Or the KLN 89 B may be interfaced with an external tone generator installed in the aircraft In order to use altitude alerting the KLN 89 B must have an altitude input If the altitude input is from an altitude encoder or from an air data computer not having a baro altitude output then it will be neces sary for you to manually input the proper altimeter setting in order to get accurate alerting Remember the altitude coming from an encoder is pressure altitude and must be corrected with the proper altimeter setting to convert to actual altitude This altimeter setting is easily accomplished by entering the altimeter bar
143. at steps 4 and 5 until all of the unnecessary waypoints are deleted 7 Now add JERRY CRESN and RENDY to FPL 0 by using the right inner and outer knobs and as necessary 8 The rest of the STAR can now be flown Chapter 5 o er o cO a e a a p 5 38 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Appendix APPENDIX A NAVIGATION TERMS u ARC Radial from reference VOR when executing an approach procedure s D with a DME arc so BRG Bearing to waypoint degrees lt DA Drift Angle degrees not displayed on KLN 89 B gt DIS Distance to waypoint nm NORTH o Desired Track degrees rey ETE Estimated Time Enroute hrs min s ETA Estimated Time of Arrival hoc p GS Groundspeed nm hr lt HDG Heading degrees X OBS Selected Course ON TRACK POS Present position P d TK Actual Track degrees a WPT Waypoint idi XTK Cross Track Error Correction nm ae displayed as FLY L 2 3 nm ES NORTH A NORTH di WPT1 OFF TRACK Enroute OBS Mode Reference VOR Appendix This page intentionally left blank Appendix A o LJ e c E c 2 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Appendix APPENDIX B MESSAGE PAGE MESSAGES NOTE Those messages marked with a double dagger symbol refer to the KLN 89B only XXXXX Deleted From FPL 0 The displayed waypoint has been
144. atellite to the correct time However you are responsible for Figure 3 12 assuring the desired time zone is selected on the KLN 89 B If it is necessary to reset the time position the cursor over the time Zone field figure 3 12 and INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET select the desired time zone Fiaure 3 13 figure 3 13 oD eet ru a lt INT USR FPL CAL SET Figure 3 11 N 9 ca 3 4 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation The KLN 89 B is capable of displaying the following time zones UTC Coordinated Universal Time Zulu GST Greenland Standard Time UTC 3 Greenland Daylight Time UTC 2 ATS Atlantic Standard Time UTC 4 ATD Atlantic Daylight Time UTC 3 EST Eastern Standard Time UTC 5 EDT Eastern Daylight Time UTC 4 CST Central Standard Time UTC 6 CDT Central Daylight Time UTC 5 MST Mountain Standard Time UTC 7 MDT Mountain Daylight Time UTC 6 PST Pacific Standard Time UTC 8 PDT Pacific Daylight Time UTC 7 AKS Alaska Standard Time UTC 9 AKD Alaska Daylight Time UTC 8 HAS Hawaii Standard Time UTC 10 HAD Hawaii Daylight Time UTC 9 SST Samoa Standard Time UTC 11 SDT Samoa Daylight Time UTC 10 LCL Local Time Zone user defined You will be able to change the time zone any time you desire on several other pages so dont worry if you re
145. ation data in this area as in figure 3 29 In these cases the APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH displayed data is not relevant to the Figure 3 29 discussion of the KLN 89 B s operation The third line of the left side has three ZRES purposes 1 If the KLN 89 B is VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH ready for you to approve something such as a selected waypoint the Figure 3 30 Ent prompt will flash figure 3 30 indicating you should press the button to continue 2 If the KLN 89 B has a new message for you which must be viewed on a message page a large M will flash in the same area figure 3 31 telling you to Figure 3 31 press the button and view the new message 3 Immediately to the right of the message enter display area the navigation mode see section 4 7 for details is dis played If the KLN 89 B is in the Leg mode the normal mode of operation Leg will be displayed here APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH The bottom line on the left side of the page divider indicates the page type that is being displayed on the right side of the screen In figure 3 31 the NAV 1 Navigation 1 page is being displayed You might think of the page types as the chapters in a book and the page numbers as the pages within a chapter Just as a chapter ina book may have from one to many pages a KLN 89 B page type may have from three to 25 pages associated with it Ther
146. ation other than O degrees is being used for navigation data NAV Super Flag Failure This message appears when an internal test fails for a specific NAV flag output The KLN 89 B is still usable but any thing connected to the super flag such as some HSls and autopilots should not be used with the KLN 89 B No GEN RS 232 In Data This message appears when no input is received on the RS 232 input such as from a fuel management or air data system No GPS Receiver Data This message appears when the KLN 89 B fails a specific internal test for the GPS receiver This failure will prevent the unit from providing any navigation capability OBS Waypoint gt 200nm or OBS Waypoint gt 370 km This mes sage is displayed when the KLN 89 B is in the OBS mode and the distance to the active waypoint is more than 200 nautical miles or 370 kilometers B 4 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Appendix Other WPTs Deleted Other waypoints deleted This message is dis played whenever more than 10 waypoints used in a flight plan including the active waypoint have been deleted Position of has Changed This message appears when either the latitude or the longitude of a waypoint used in a flight plan or the active waypoint has changed by more than 33 minutes as a result of updating the data base Positions of Other WPTs Have Changed This message appears when the above message Position of has Changed would be effective for
147. ayed next to the ETA field Use the outer knob to move the cursor over the minutes field Use the inner and outer knobs to select tens of minutes and single min utes as required When the desired time is selected press The RAIM calculations will start 6 The RAIM calculation will usually take a few seconds before an answer is reached During this time the OTH 3 page will be asw VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH shown in figure 5 28 Figure 5 28 7 Once the RAIM calculation is complete the OTH 3 page will indi cate the results of the test An example is shown in figure 5 29 and 5 30 RAIM is available from 15 minutes before ETA until 5 minutes after ETA However RAIM is predict ed not to be available from then until 15 minutes after the ETA By showing the times when RAIM will be available it is possible for you to how to alter your ETA to ensure that there will not be any RAIM problems APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 5 29 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Even more rare will be the case when Figure 5 30 the KLN 89B cannot provide sufficient integrity monitoring or if there is an actual satellite failure while the air craft is on the leg from the FAF to the MAP In these cases the KLN 5 28 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Approaches and SID STARs 89B will FLAG the navigation solution and a missed approach will have to be flown The KLN 89B will provide the following mess
148. breviations used to denote these areas are the following Class B CL B Class C CL C Control Area used outside USA CTA Terminal Area used outside USA TMA Alert Area ALRT Caution Area CAUT Danger Area DNGR Military Operations Area MOA Prohibited Area PROH Restricted Area REST Training Area TRNG Warning Area WARN Terminal Radar Service Area TRSA The KLN 89 B will normally alert you prior to entering one of these areas with a message prompt When the Message page is viewed it will display Airspace Alert and will also display the name and type of the special use airspace figure 3 200 If the special Figure 3 200 use airspace is a Class B Class C CTA or TMA the message page will also instruct you to press the but ton if you wish to see the Airport 5 page airport communications for the primary airport so that the correct EBENE E communications frequency may be Figure 3 201 determined figure 3 201 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 3 68 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation NOTE In addition to the message page messages that alert you to special use airspace the KLN 89 B can also display the five nearest areas of SUA It will even give you the direction and distance to the nearest edge of the SUA See section 3 8 2 for more details The SUA alert feature is three dimensional The SUA areas are stored in the KLN 89 B data base with regard to altitude when the actual SUA altitude limitatio
149. brings up the display menu on the screen You then use the right knobs to select APT on and SUA on so that nearby airports and special use airspace SUA are shown on the moving map display While the menu is displayed select the track up map orientation TK as well Pressing the button again removes the menu from the screen Since it is a good idea to not rely on just one navigation source you suggest we cross check the KLN 89 B position against other equipment in the aircraft The NAV 2 page indicates we are presently located on the Texarkana TXK VOR 68 degree radial at a distance of 19 nautical miles By tuning our NAV receiver and DME to TXK we are able to confirm that this is the correct position 3 18 3 TERMINAL AREA 1 About 50 nautical miles from Austin s Mueller airport we start preparing four our arrival Viewing the APT 5 page for KAUS you determine that the ATIS frequency is 119 20 MHz and tower is 121 00 MHz A few minutes later the message prompt begins flashing When you press ss the message page advises Airspace Alert Austin CL C Below 4600 ft See KAUS freq Press CLR The Special Use Airspace Alert feature has determined that you are within 10 minutes of penetrating the Austin Class C airspace When you press and view the APT 5 page for KAUS you see that the Class C airspace frequencies are sectorized You determine from the APT 5 page that the proper frequency to use is 124 90 MHz since we are Northeast
150. c procedure is flown entirely in the LEG mode the only possible problem would be if the integrity monitoring did not check out 14 The visual descent point is identified by the along track dis tance to the MAP to be 1 5 NM When the aircraft reaches this point figure 5 26 and the run way environment is in sight it is possible to descend for a landing APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 5 26 If a missed approach is needed use the following steps 15 The missed approach calls for a climb to 2000 and then a left turn direct to FOW The KLN 89B will not automatically sequence past the MAP 16 Once 2000 feet has been reached press the missed approach holding point will be the default direct to waypoint Press to confirm the direct to waypoint and proceed to the FOW VOR NOTE If ATC gives you instructions for a missed approach that is different from the published missed approach procedure it is always possible for you to select a different direct to waypoint than the default direct to waypoint 17 The OBS mode will need to be selected to accomplish the hold ing pattern If this is not done before the aircraft is 4 NM from FOW the KLN 89B will provide a message reminding you to select the OBS mode 5 26 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Approaches and SID STARs NOTE f another attempt at the approach is desired after holding it is necessary to manually change the active waypoint When the FAF a
151. cal order 2 After reading the message press again to return to the page previously in view If all of the messages cannot be displayed on one Message page repeated presses will show the other messages before returning to normal operation If a message con dition exists which requires a specific action by you the message prompt will remain on but will not flash 3 6 INITIALIZATION AND TIME TO FIRST FIX Since the KLN 89 B stores its position and other required parameters in memory when power to the unit is removed it is seldom necessary to aid the unit in reaching a NAV ready condition The time required from power on until the KLN 89 B determines its present position and is therefore ready to navigate is called time to first fix The time to first fix is normally a few minutes or less In order for the KLN 89 B to reach a NAV ready condition it is necessary to meet the following con ditions 1 The KLN 89 B s almanac data should be current Almanac data is orbital information for all the satellites and is used for initial acquisition when the KLN 89 B is first turned on This data is stored in the KLN 89 B s non volatile memory and is considered current for up to six months Each satellite sends almanac data for all satellites Since the KLN 89 B routinely updates the almanac data during normal operation the almanac data will become out of date only if the KLN 89 B hasn t been used for the previous
152. ch that follows An example of this is shown on line 1 of figure 5 7 which indicates that the VOR 25R approach for Los Angeles International Airport is in the active flight plan FPL 0 After the approach has been entered into the flight plan the KLN 89B checks to make sure that the resulting flight plan makes sense If the KLN 89B detects any waypoints that are in both the en route por tion of the flight plan and the portion that makes up the approach then the following message will be given Redundant Wpts in FPL Edit En Route Wpts As Necessary 5 6 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Approaches and SID STARs Examine the flight plan and delete those en route waypoints that are not necessary NOTE Approaches can only be entered into FPL 0 the active flight plan If the KLN 89B is turned off for more than 5 minutes then the approach is deleted when power is turned back on 5 1 2 INTERPRETING WHAT YOU SEE In the example above you may have noticed a couple of waypoints with somewhat strange names The second waypoint of the approach procedure LAX18 has a name that is not normal for a waypoint This is an example of what are called terminal waypoints These are waypoints that are associated with a specific airport They are used to define a spot on the ground that does not have a normal waypoint name In the case of LAX18 this point is 18 NM from the LAX VOR on the 68 radial The fifth waypoint in the approach pro ce
153. ch waypoint the estimated time en route ETE the estimated time of arrival ETA for which the time zone abbreviation is displayed or the mag netic desired track Dtk between each waypoint If you have more than four waypoints in FPL 0 you may wish to view flight data for waypoints which are not displayed on the screen If this is the case turn on the cursor lesr and use the right outer knob to scroll down the flight plan until the waypoint of interest is on the Screen This display will default to the dis tance Dis presentation at power on figure 4 45 The area in the upper right hand corner of the screen is a cyclic field which means that Figure 4 46 INT USR ACT NAV FPL To cycle between distance ETE ETA and desired track on the FPL 0 page 1 Turn on the cursor lesr it will a come up over the cyclic field Figure 4 47 which in this case is displaying distance Dis in nautical miles or kilometers figure 4 46 2 Press ber Subsequent presses of the button will cycle through ETE in hours minutes figure 4 47 ETA in terms of the system time zone figure 4 48 magnetic Dtk figure 4 49 then back to Dis INT USR ACT NAV FPL Figure 4 48 y 191020 gt C U N 9 e NOTE When the cursor is over the cyclic field and it is displaying the time zone turning the right inner knob changes th
154. change to 0 3 NM when in the APR ACTV mode The ARM mode can be selected in two ways The normal way is that this mode will be selected automatically by the KLN 89B when the aircraft is within 30 NM of an airport and an approach is loaded in the flight plan for that airport It is possible to arm the approach mode at a distance greater than 30 NM from the airport by pressing the exter nal GPS approach switch but the KLN 89B will not change the CDI scale factor until the aircraft reaches the 30 NM point If the GPS APR external switch is pressed while the approach mode is armed then the KLN 89B will disarm the approach and change back to en route mode The CDI scale factor will also change back to 5 0 NM The approach can be re armed by simply pressing the GPS APR switch again The APR ACTV mode can only be engaged automatically by the KLN 89B To cancel the APR ACTV mode press the external GPS APR switch This will change the mode to APR ARM Once past the FAF it is not possible to return to the approach active mode without con ducting a missed approach and flying back to the FAF General Procedure for Non Precision Approaches Non precision approaches will all have the general flow of events as follows Refer to figure 5 1 1 Select and load the approach into the flight plan This can be done at almost any time but must be completed before reaching the Final Approach Fix and should be done as soon as possible 5 2 KLN 89 KLN 89B
155. cters of the waypoint identifier will be APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH flashing figure 3 77 Figure 3 77 3 23 e D T Lom ad 00121900 490 218 9 basic GPS Operation 5 Use the right inner knob to leaf through all the data base airports whose identifiers begin with KL You will see KL6 Little Bear Lake Airport In Saskatchewan figure 3 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 78 and KLAS McCarran Figure 3 78 International in Las Vegas Nevada among others 3 7 4 SELECTING WAYPOINTS BY NAME OR CITY When you know the identifier of the desired waypoint you will use one of the two methods just described to select it However what if you know the name but you don t know the identifier of your desired waypoint You re in luck because the KLN 89 B will allow you to enter the first few characters of the name to help you find it in the data base We will use a couple of examples to illustrate how this is done For VORs and NDBs you may use the navaid name For air ports you may use the airport name or the city name where the airport is located In this first example we want to view the information in the KLN 89 B data base for Napoleon VOR located just east of Kansas City but we don t remember the identifier for it c p re a Bes lt To select a VOR NDB navaid name d d N a A ca 1 With the curs
156. ctually use the KLN 89 B Figure 3 1 can be folded out and used as a reference during the following procedures This is especially handy if you re learning while away from your GPS The steps below take a lot of words to explain but before you know it you will be flying through them NOTE When power is applied to the KLN 89 B it always wakes up in the Leg mode Only the Leg mode is described in this chapter In this mode the KLN 89 B performs great circle navigation the shortest distance between two points located on the earth s surface The course deviation output displayed on the unit s internal course deviation indicator CDI and provided to an external horizontal situa tion indicator HSI or CDI is five nautical miles full scale sensitivity left and right in Leg mode The other modes are described in section 4 7 and chapter 5 3 1 Jeydeu uoleiadg 49 215 9 d d N e 0 ca oD 5 re lt basic GPS Operation To turn on and initialize the KLN 89 B 1 Turn on the KLN 89 B by turning the small power knob clockwise The Power On page figure 3 3 will be displayed for a few seconds During this time the KLN 89 B performs an extensive internal test The operational BIZETTETTNTEICNNCNET RIDES E revision status ORS level num ber in the upper right corner of the display should match the ORS level indicated on the cover of this Pilots Guide
157. d Time ALT Altitude APT Airport ATD Atlantic Daylight Time ATS Atlantic Standard Time BRG Bearing CAL Calculator CDT Central Daylight Time CHAR Character CRS Course CRSR Cursor CST Central Standard Time DB Data base DEGRD Degraded navigation DIS Distance DTK Desired track DUP Duplicate E East EDT Eastern Daylight Time ELE Elevation ENT Enter EST Eastern Standard Time ETA Estimated time of arrival x ETE Estimated time en route ME FAILR Failure of receiver FPL Flight plan FPM Feet per minute FR From GDT Greenland Daylight Time GS Groundspeed GST Greenland Standard Time HAD Hawaii Daylight Time HAS Hawaii Standard Time D 17 sa uS S a sb o n 22 Appendix HLT IDENT INIT KM KT L LCL M MAG VAR MDT MPM MSG MST N N NAV NAV A NAV D NM OBS ORS OTH P POS PDT POS POSN PRES PRS PST PUB PWR RAD RCVR REF REQ RES S S SDT SET OTHER ABBREVIATIONS Cont d Health of space vehicle signal Identifier Initialization Kilometers Knots Left Local Meters Magnetic variation Mountain Daylight Time Meters per minute Message Mountain Standard Time NDB waypoint North Navigation Navigation with altitude aiding Navigation with data collection Nautical miles Omni bearing selection Operational Revision Status Other Present position Pacific Daylight Time Position Position Present Pressure Pacific Standard Time
158. d flight plan 4 4 Waypoint in the OBS mode 4 39 Actual track 3 38 3 43 A 1 Adding waypoints to flight plan 4 2 Air data pages 4 44 Airport data Bearing and distance 3 46 City State or country 3 45 Communication frequencies 3 49 Fuel availability 3 47 Identifier 2 4 Instrument approach availability 3 47 Latitude longitude 3 46 Military 3 45 Name 3 45 Nearest 3 27 3 46 Radar capability 3 47 Remarks 3 50 Runway information 3 48 Airport waypoint pages 3 45 Airspeed 4 27 4 28 Alarm 4 26 Alerting Altitude 4 14 opecial Use Airspace SUA 3 68 Voltage avionics bus 3 67 Waypoint 3 35 4 9 Almanac 3 18 3 63 F 2 1 Index Altitude Alerting 4 14 Density 4 27 Indicated 3 2 3 58 4 26 Input 1 1 3 58 Minimum en route safe ESA 3 59 Minimum safe MSA 3 59 Pages 3 58 4 14 4 17 Pressure 3 58 4 26 4 27 4 28 Annunciators remote 3 66 5 1 Antenna 1 1 Approach active ACTV mode 5 4 Approach armed ARM mode 5 4 Approaches Changing 5 9 Deleting 5 9 Loading 5 6 Selecting 5 5 APT 1 Name City page 3 45 APT 2 Lat Lon distance page 3 46 APT 3 Airspace timezone apr type page 3 47 APT 4 Runways Rnwy length page 3 48 APT 5 VHF frequencies page 3 49 APT 6 pilot remarks page 3 50 APT 7 departures arrivals page 3 51 APT 8 approaches page 3 52 ARTCC Center Abbreviations D 8 Frequencies 3 31 AUTO map scale 3 42 5 21 Autopilot 1 1 B Baro set 3 2 3 58 Battery 2 8 Bearing to waypoint 3
159. d numbered flight plans 1 Use the right outer and inner knobs to select the desired flight plan page figure 4 10 2 Press to turn on the cursor G CT It will appear over Use Figure 4 10 figure 4 11 If you haven t left the numbered flight plan since creating this flight plan rotate the outer knob counterclockwise to position the Cursor over Use APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 4 11 f M 4 4 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Advanced GPS Operation 3 Press to activate the flight plan in the order shown figure 4 12 To activate the flight plan in inverse order first waypoint becomes last and last waypoint becomes first rotate the outer knob one step clock wise to position the cursor over Use Inverted before pressing Lent The result is shown in figure 4 13 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 4 13 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 4 12 4 The selected flight plan is now displayed as FPL 0 the active flight plan Any changes made to FPL 0 will not affect how this flight plan is stored as the num bered flight plan 4 1 4 ADDING A WAYPOINT TO A FLIGHT PLAN A waypoint may be added to any flight plan containing fewer than 20 waypoints To add a waypoint to a flight plan 1 Turn on the cursor with the button 2 With the outer knob position the cursor over the waypoint identi fier which you desire to follow the waypoint
160. d the WPT annunciator Have the installation checked to determine the problem Data Base Error Publ Data Not Useable Service Required This message appears if the data base fails an internal test when the KLN 89 B is turned on Data Base Outdated All Data Must be Confirmed Before Use This message appears when the data base is b 2 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Appendix out of date as a result of a date and time entered on the SET 2 page or Self Test page or as a result of a pilot entered date being overridden by a date from the GPS receiver GEN RS 232 Data In Error This message appears when an error is detected in the received RS 232 data such as from a fuel management or air data system GPS Course is XXX This message is displayed to notify the user that the GPS desired track DTK has changed This message will only be dis played when the KLN 89 B is not reading selected course from an external HSI or CDI When the KLN 89 B is in Leg mode this message occurs if the course change is greater than 5 See section 4 2 2 tf Required Select OBS This message appears when the aircraft is 4 nautical miles from a waypoint which could be used as the basis for either a procedure turn or a holding pattern and the KLN 89B is in the LEG mode Select the OBS mode when flying procedure turns or holding pat terns This message is advisory only If no procedure turn is required then no action is required Inside SUA
161. d to on the Setup 1 SET 1 page see section 3 6 Initialization and Time to First Fix In addition a ground speed and heading may be entered on the SET 1 page and the KLN 89 B will track a flight plan or a direct to waypoint just as if it was actually functioning in an aircraft Distances count down waypoints sequence and the devia tion bar follows the progress of the simulated flight Using the take home mode is an excellent way to learn the operation of the KLN 89 B without worrying about the engine running other traffic or even terrain Fortunately these phenomena are not simulated in the take home mode 4 48 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Approaches and SID STARs 5 APPROACHES AND SID STARS KLN 89B ONLY This is the last chapter on the operation of the KLN 89 B In this chapter you will learn how to use the KLN 89B for non precision approach and SID STAR procedures Note that only KLN 89Bs which are configured for IFR approaches are capable of performing the procedures discussed in this chapter KLN 89Bs which are con figured for en route and terminal operations only will give you access to SID STAR procedures but not non precision procedures All of these procedures require that you are comfortable with the operation of the unit as presented up to this point In particular you need to be comfortable with flight plan operation sections 4 1 and 4 2 and the OBS mode section 4 7 5 1 NON PRECISION APPROACH OPERATIONS
162. de MEAM c N ERUIT TEV TER S10158A 158dX3 Jul Kpuag 01 0 H NDY BIA HOA NOY 2800 Wld ujnog Buipue c t a 5 Ej tte AGN3A TAs LOOM ote ZEN 3ONVITIV HLYOM 14 ONY ier a Ban an POS tun 56 W dow Ti Tw NOLNAG HiV TI34SUYO NYHOV3IA HLHOM Ld ONIONYT SL3nOg8ufrL NON m eS Sg MISSA 14 411 Jug JBAJ8 SVXil SvTlwC gu SWX3I HLHOM 14 1612a j3adxg ju NOY BA HOA NOY woly u110w Bujpusg Lm fac 31v25 O1 LON 85 no2 uoecadde jeu 01 101284 10 Buipeay 25 2020 BIN usui 10 Apuay 91 C 0 H NOY Ba HOA NOY 1840 ujnos Soa gf HLHOM 14 8V11Y0 SNIONY1 51 e Sia i 0006 18 10 8042 oy ID8dx3 SvIM QSZ 18 1 URW 580225 Tu jg 4g 1e HI So Q 101584 138dX3 ul 432940 9 Ob0 HB NOY BIA HOA NDY 1940 43 40N Burpuge 3 uostppy t DA SwIM 18 10 38242 9047 00011 18 10 UaINH 39049 Oh SYXJL svTIwGd aup li j sdx3 SwIM OGZ 18 101 U INH 8049 884009 YoROUdde EUI 0 10 934 10 SW HIHOM Lj VIA ueqj Ju 38942 0 OFO H NOY EIA HOA NOY u1nos Sujpue1 Nur 1j 5PB EXT 210 OS LEN 32NYITIY HLHOM Ld ONY NOLN3O BdY 1T13458v2 cer iia HYHOV3I HLYOM 13 1LNI HLHOM La S 11V0 9NIONY 1 SL3r0gHn Mid 0 Zli C zd 79 260M EBL EEM TVAIHUV LFSYTIYO ida i 2094 SSZ H NOW 0 H
163. deleted from the active flight plan FPL 0 when an approach SID or STAR was added to FPL 0 The pre existing waypoint was deleted because adding the APR SID STAR to the flight plan caused the same waypoint to be list ed consecutively in FPL 0 If the APR SID STAR is later deleted from FPL 0 the original waypoint can only be restored by manual re entry Adj Nav Crs to XXX Adjust navigation indicator course to XXX When this message appears you should select the suggested course on the HSI or CDI When the KLN 89 B is in the Leg mode this message occurs during turn anticipation prior to reaching the active waypoint if the upcoming course change is greater than 5 and anytime the indicator s selected course needs to be adjusted to match the KLN 89 B desired track This message will only be displayed if the KLN 89 B is installed such that it can read the selected HSI or CDI course See section 4 2 2 Airspace Alert name and type of special use airspace altitude boundaries responsible ATC facility This message appears when the estimated time to enter a special use airspace SUA is approximately 10 minutes or when the distance from an area of special use airspace is less than two nautical miles See section 3 17 All Wpt Remarks Used Delete on OTH 4 Page This message will be displayed if you attempt to enter a waypoint remark and the user data base already contains 100 waypoint remarks Altitude Fail This me
164. dure MA25B is another type of terminal waypoint In this case this point is the missed approach point for runway 25 This approach applies to both the left and right runways so the letter B is used to mean both There are few other types of terminal waypoints that you will need to be familiar with to fully understand GPS non precision approaches The naming convention for these waypoints are as follows Fxyyy F stands for Final Approach Fix 1 stands for Intermediate Fix Cxyyy C stands for Course Fix Mxyyy Mstands for Missed Approach Point HWzzz RW stands for Runway Fix This is usually the MAP for the approach zzz Will be a runway number possibly including L for Left R for Right C for Center or B for Both Daaab D stands for DME arc waypoint e aaa is the radial that the fix is on from the reference VOR b will be a letter corresponding to the distance from the reference VOR For example G is the seventh letter of the alohabet so D234G would be a point on the 234 radial 7 NM from the reference 9s G 13 dey9 gt 9 e cD 9 2 e gt c gt JJ Chapter 5 N er d o cO a e a a e p Approaches and SID STARs VOR DME arcs greater than 26 NM will have waypoints where the first two characters are the first two letters of the DME identifier The next three characters
165. e KLN 89 B and now it s time to put those features to work for us and try a sample trip Our trip will be from Adams field KLIT in Little Rock Arkansas to Mueller Municipal airport KAUS in Austin Texas The weather is perfect and we decide to make trip VFR and fly direct to Austin 3 18 1 PRE DEPARTURE 1 Apply power to the KLN 89 B by turning the power knob to the ON position 2 Verify that the information on the Self Test and Initialization pages is correct including the time and date Enter the altimeter baro setting Position the cursor over Ok and press to approve the Initialization page Read the Data Base page and acknowledge it by pressing t 4 The APT 5 page for Adams field KLIT which shows the com munications frequencies is now displayed on the screen since KLIT was the active waypoint when you last removed power from the KLN 89 B The first APT 5 page indicates that the ATIS fre quency is 125 65 MHz the pre taxi clearance delivery frequency is 118 95 MHz and the ground control frequency is 121 90 MHz After listening to ATIS we contact clearance delivery for our clearance out of the Little Rock Class C airspace Next we give ground control a call and receive our taxi clearance 5 Bythis time the KLN 89 B has reached a NAV ready status We can verify this by turning to the NAV 2 page lt shows a valid present position in this case 3 8 nautical miles on the 320 degree radial from Little Rock LIT VOR
166. e are for example 25 flight plan pages FPL 0 FPL 1 FPL 2 FPL 25 in the flight plan page type and up to eight airport pages APT 1 APT 2 APT 8 in the airport page type Figure 3 32 shows an example of an APT 5 page Notice the sign in the page identification Whenever a sign is part of a page identifier there will be two or more pages all having the same page number used to present all of the required information That is all of the infor APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 3 32 3 10 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation mation associated with a particular page number doesn t fit on the page being viewed In this case the sign indicates that there are two or more APT 5 pages Figure 3 33 shows the APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH second APT 5 page for KICT Wichita Figure 3 33 Mid Continent Airport The lower left corner of the display where the page type and number are usually displayed can also display short operational messages to the PT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH user called scratchpad messages Figure 3 34 These messages are displayed for approximately five seconds then this area returns to a display of the page type and number Figure 3 34 shows an example of a scratch pad message indicating a duplicate identifier A complete listing of scratchpad messages is available in Appendix C of this Pilot s Guide 3 4
167. e cursor off 3 23 Select a waypoint by scanning with the cursor on 3 23 Select an airport by scanning the airport name 3 25 Select and load an approach into the active flight plan FPL 0 5 5 Serme alat bets t uc tv cr S cr roa dS NS s LIEU 4 26 Set the date on the SET 2 page 3 60 Set the time on the SET 2 3 61 Specify the nearest airport criteria 3 28 Store the active flight plan as a numbered flight plan 4 7 Turn on and initialize the KLN 89 B 3 2 Update the KLN 89 B data base by computer 2 6 Use altitude alerting 4 14 Use the NAV 1 page to view the VNAV status 4 20 Use VNAV on a Direct To 4 17 S 3 18 View the waypoints in the flight plan that are not the eM 4 11 Vi KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Introduction This page intentionally left blank vii System Components KLN 89 B SYSTEM REQUIRED FOR ALL INSTALLATIONS REQUIRED FOR IFR APPROA
168. e for the waypoint you are looking for APT VOR NDB INT or USR 2 Pull the right inner knob to the out position 3 Turn the right inner Knob clockwise to scan through the waypoints in alphabetical order or counterclockwise to scan in reverse alphabetical order Remember that numbers are considered lower in order than letters Thus the airport identifier KA2 comes before KAAF NOTE The faster you turn the knob while scanning the larger the step through the waypoints This variable rate scanning allows you to get from one end of the list to the other very quickly When the knob is turned slowly you will go through the waypoints one at a time You may also want to scan waypoints with the cursor on This is especially useful if you remember the first part of the identifier or if you wanted to scan all airports that start with a KL for example Let s give it a try To select a waypoint by scanning with the cursor on 1 Select the page type for the waypoint you are looking for APT VOR NDB INT or USR In this case we want the APT 1 page 2 Turn on the cursor lesr It will appear over the first character of the waypoint identifier Select a K with the right inner knob APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 3 Move th h ove the cursor one piace to the Figure 3 76 right and select an L figure 3 76 4 Move the cursor one place to the right and pull the right inner knob out The last two chara
169. e radial bearing field and pressing toggles between radial from and bearing to the airport If the airport is being viewed as part of the nearest airports list see section 3 8 1 the APT 2 page format will APT VOR INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH differ as follows see figure 3 140 Figure 3 140 Line 1 After the airport identifier the number designating the air port s position the nearest airport list is displayed Line 2 The city where the airport is located 3 46 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation Line 3 The State if the airport is located in the U S the Province if located in Canada or the country if outside the U S and Canada A listing of the abbreviations used for States Provinces and countries is contained in Appendix D The right side of line 3 displays HELIPORT MILITARY or PRIVATE as appropriate Line 4 The magnetic bearing to or the magnetic radial from the air port and the distance Placing the cursor over the radial bearing field and pressing toggles between radial from and bearing to the air port 3 11 1 3 The Airport 3 APT 3 Page See figure 3 141 Line 1 The ICAO identifier see sec tion 2 3 of the airport an arrow precedes the identifier if it is the active waypoint Also on line 1 is the Figure 3 141 environment For example the airport in figure 3 141 has overlying Class C airspace The possible environments are APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH
170. e system time zone figure 4 50 INT USR ACT NAV FPL Figure 4 50 4 13 Chapter 4 e a e c e a C5 ET ce 3 a ES T lt Advanced GPS Operation NOTE When the KLN 89 B is in OBS mode the FPL 0 page will pre sent OBS selected course OBS as an option instead of magnetic desired track Dtk The selected course will be displayed to the right of the active waypoint and the OBS fields for all other waypoints will be dashed figure 4 51 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 4 51 4 3 ALTITUDE ALERTING If your aircraft does not already have an altitude alerting capability you may wish to use the KLN 89 B s capability of assisting you with alti tude management during your flying Altitude alerting allows you to select a target altitude and it then provides you with an aural alarm 1000 feet prior to reaching the selected altitude another aural alarm upon reaching the selected altitude and another aural alarm if you deviate from the selected altitude NOTE The altitude alerting function of the KLN 89 B does not meet FAR Part 91 for turbojet powered civil airplanes NOTE Before you use the altitude alerting function it is a good idea to make sure that the KLN 89 B baro setting is current To do this press the button and use the right inner knob to modify the baro setting To Use Altitude Alerting 1 Select the Setup SET 9 page and turn on the cursor esr It wil
171. ed In addition the KLN 89 B contains an internal battery powered calendar clock to keep system time and date when the unit is not being used You will normally check to make sure the KLN 89 B is set to the correct time and date shortly after you turn the unit on while you verify the Self Test Page You can however also check the time and date on the Setup SET 2 page anytime you desire There are several pages as well as some internal functions of the KLN 89 B such as magnetic variation and proper use of data base informa tion that depend on having the proper time and date NOTE You will not be able to update the time or date if the KLN 89 B is receiving a time and date from a satellite To set the date on the SET 2 page 1 Select the SET 2 page figure 3 173 2 Turn on the Cursor The cursor will APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH ad the entire date field figure Figure 3 173 3 Select the correct day of the month with the right inner knob 4 Move the flashing part of the P cursor to the month field middle three dashes with the right outer knob and select the proper month figure 3 175 5 Move the flashing part of the cursor to the tens digit of the year APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH field and select the proper number Figure 3 175 figure 3 176 VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 3 174 M 3 60 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation 6
172. ed with a double dagger symbol t Likewise chapter 5 Approaches and SID STARs applies only to KLN 89B For features that apply to both KLN 89 and KLN 89B a generic reference to KLN 89 B is used NOTE A whiskers border is used around data on some of the figures in this Pilot s Guide to indicate that the data inside the border is flashing WARNING The KLN 89 and KLN 89B display GPS derived alti tude on the OTH 1 page Do not use the GPS derived altitude for navigation Due to Selective Availability position degradation and other factors the GPS altitude is normally 300 feet or more in error which is unacceptable for vertical navigation Revision History and Instructions Manual KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Revision 5 September 2002 Part Number 006 08786 0000 This revision contains the following changes Changed AlliedSignal to Honeywell throughout Editorial Corrections Inside Front Cover Title Page R 1 through R 4 3 26 3 56 4 11 4 37 Back Cover Database Change Database Card 2 0 2 1 2 6 3 6 SET 2 Corrections 3 9 3 60 3 61 4 47 Misc Corrections 4 29 5 20 5 22 B 5 B 6 C 1 D 2 R 1 Revision History and Instructions Manual KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Hevision 4 May 1998 Part Number 006 08786 0000 This revision contains the following changes Text corrections to pages 3 64 3 66 4 47 and B 5 Figure 3 196 changed to show new software numbering display and the addition of the database number
173. efaults to present position in terms of the radial and distance from a nearby VOR You can change the reference waypoint from the nearby VOR to any APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH waypoint Figure 3 120 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH To change the NAV 2 page present position reference waypoint 1 With the NAV 2 page on the radial and distance from a reference waypoint format turn on the Cursor move it APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH to the Ref field figure 3 121 Figure 3 121 Z 2 M C D T Lom ad 2 Use the right inner and outer knobs enter the waypoint you wish to use as a reference uoljeiadg 49 218 9 3 Press r The waypoint page for the identifier just entered will be displayed a Z M 4 If this is the waypoint you intend ed press again The display APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH will return to the NAV 2 page Figure 3 122 figure 3 122 NOTE f you change the reference waypoint change to a page other than the NAV 2 page then turn back to the NAV 2 page the reference waypoint will revert back to a nearby VOR By turning on the cursor lesr over the first line and pressing er you can change to the latitude and longitude format NOTE Your present position may be stored as a user defined way point by pressing while viewing the NAV 2 page See section 4 6 1 Creating a waypoin
174. eing the brightest 4 being the Figure 3 25 normal default level APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 2 Turn the right inner knob to select the desired brightness figure 3 26 To test the bright ness level you will probably want to be in a dark cockpit condition Figure 3 26 If desired you can also test it out by placing your finger over the photocell in the upper left corner of the KLN 89 B 3 Turn off the cursor c5 The top left corner of the screen always displays distance to the active waypoint in nice large numbers ERNEUT TETTE figure 3 27 The identifier of the Figure 3 27 active waypoint is usually displayed on the second line This area of the display will be particularly useful to you if you are shooting non precision approaches using the KLN 89B since it lets you know where you re going and how far until you get there Sa TN APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH e D T Lom ad CD Ln 1 00121900 49 218 9 NOTE cases when the active waypoint identifier is displayed on the right side of the page divider line 2 will display the current groundspeed figure 3 28 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 3 28 3 9 d d N e A ca oD p re a lt basic GPS Operation NOTE For purposes of this Pilot s Guide many of the screen illustrations do not show actual navig
175. eld and then enter the desired 2s8s value figure 4 64 Vertical speed may be selected in incre Figure 4 64 ments of 100 feet per minute or 10 meters per minute If the time to begin your descent is greater than one hour Vnv Armed will now be displayed on the top line of the page If the time is less than one hour the top line displays a countdown to the time to begin the descent 7 Return to any desired page for now by pressing the button once Alternatively you may turn off the and use the outer knob to change pages Approximately 90 seconds before the time to begin descent the message prompt will flash When you view the Message page it will display Vnv Alert This is notification for you to view the ALT 2 or NAV 1 page see section 4 4 3 because it is getting close to the time to begin your descent 8 When the countdown timer reaches 0 00 the time will be replaced with an advisory altitude APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL figure 4 65 Begin your descent at a rate such that the altitude displayed on your altimeter matches the advisory altitude NOTE During your descent check your actual groundspeed to veri fy that it is similar to the one you entered on the ALT 2 page If it is different you should enter your actual groundspeed so that the VNAV function will work properly If you make any changes to the from or to altitudes the VNAV waypoint or the waypoint offset once VNAV has been armed or
176. elect your anticipated groundspeed for the descent Z APT VOR NDB INT USR FPL CAL SET figure 4 62 remembering that it Figure 4 62 may increase from your current groundspeed when you start descending Notice that the bottom right corner of the ALT 2 page now displays a verti cal speed If you wish to start your descent now using the displayed ver 22956 tical speed use the outer knob to SEGRE position the cursor over the vertical Figure 4 63 speed field figure 4 63 VNAV oper ation is initiated by bringing the cursor over the vertical speed field Or by leaving the cursor off of this field you may watch the required vertical soeed increase as you fly toward your waypoint When the 4 18 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Advanced GPS Operation desired vertical speed is reached position the cursor over the vertical speed field and VNAV will commence When VNAV begins the top of the page displays an advisory altitude Descending at the vertical speed displayed on line 4 should keep you very close to the VNAV advisory altitude but you may need to make slight adjustments to stay right on pace A better way yet to initiate VNAV is to program a desired vertical speed to use for the descent after you have entered the desired alti tude waypoint offset and groundspeed To program a vertical speed do the following step 6 Use the right outer knob to move the cursor to the vertical speed fi
177. er d o cO a e a a e p Approaches and SID STARs 5 1 6 EXAMPLE APPROACH RADAR VECTORS For this example we will use the same approach that was used in the previous section except this approach will be conducted with the help of radar vectors from approach control The aircraft will be assumed to be arriving from the West although this does not change the way the approach will be flown using the KLN 89B 1 The approach has been selected and entered into the flight plan and the aircraft is going direct to KCVN Clovis New Mexico Municipal as described in section 5 1 5 2 As soon as ATC mentions radar vectors you should immediately start to think of the OBS mode Once given radar vectors change the active waypoint to TXO and select the OBS mode Note that it is not important what order these events take place It is just as effective to change to OBS mode and then change the active waypoint as it is to change the active waypoint and then switch to OBS mode 3 Next change the selected course on the CDI or HSI to the final approach course For this exam ple the inbound course is 241 It is now possible to watch your progress on the NAV 4 page and anticipate when you will be given APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH new headings to fly figure 5 18 Figure 5 18 4 Once established on the inbound course you will need to change back to the Leg mode to allow for pro
178. er changes altitude changes head wind tailwind component changes fuel air mixture adjustments and routing changes The OTH 7 OTH 8 OTH 9 and OTH 10 pages are used to display fuel management information for KLN 89 B s interfaced with compatible fuel management computers If there is no fuel management computer inter face these fuel management pages are not displayed 48 1 THE OTHER 7 OTH 7 PAGE The OTH 7 pages display the following information figures 4 131 and 4 132 he destination waypoint the final waypoint in FPL 0 or a direct 77077 to waypoint if the waypoint is not Figure 4 131 included in FPL 0 An arrow is displayed to the left of the identifi er if the waypoint is the active waypoint APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 4 132 The fuel units as received from the fuel management computer GAL gallons LB pounds IMP imperial gallons L liters KG Kilograms The fuel presently on board Fuel OB In most installations this is defined by using the fuel flow computer s control unit However if 4 42 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Advanced GPS Operation the KLN 89 B is interfaced with a compatible Shadin fuel flow computer it is possible to define the fuel on board by using the KLN 89 B In these installations it is not required to have the fuel flow computer s control head installed in the aircraft To change the present fuel on board 1 2 Select the first OTH 7 p
179. following steps and refer to figure 5 16 for the procedure For this example assume that the aircraft is JEPPESEN 4DEC 92 13 1 GACT CLOVIS N MEX awos 3 135 357 CLOVIS MUN CANNON Approach iR 125 5 VOR Rwy 22 5000 ALBUQUERQUE Center R 126 85 when App voR 112 2 TXO Apt Elev 4214 NoPT Arrival Sector via Airway MSA TXO VOR CLOVIS MUN UNICOM CTAF 122 8 CAUTION Cannon AFB 12 NM WSW heavy USAF fighter traffic F 34 30 082 4720 A z 1 91122 no NOT FOR NAVIGATION 193 00 102 56 Pilot controlled lighting 1 0 Hogi 241 TOZE 4214 M q Min 7 FIR 2 non 20142147 MISSED APPROACH Climbing LEFT turn to 5700 direct TXO VOR and hold STRAIGHT IN LANDING RWY 22 4640 4287 moan 49 40 7267 With 08 0 CIRCLE TO LAND With D 0 Without DB 0 MDA H 4940 7267 2 i 11 2 4940 i726 2 1 4 ANN eed Kts 70 90 100 Lc 160 Fea VOR 10 12 1 10 22 8 04 7 16 6 03 5 11 4 32 CHANGES Procedur e JEPPESEN SANDERSON INC 1390 1992 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Reproduced with permission of Jeppesen Sanderson Inc Reduced for illustrative purpases Figure 5 16 5 14 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Approaches and SID STARs approaching from the Northeast going Direct to the Clovis
180. fuel reserve requirement field and enter the desired value As you do watch the calculation of fuel required on line 4 change figure 4 80 INT USR ACT NAV FPL Figure 4 80 4 24 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Advanced GPS Operation To calculate fuel requirements for a flight plan 1 From the CAL 2 page turn on the cursor c58 It will appear over a cyclic field that either displays Wpt waypoint to waypoint or Fpl flight plan 2 For this type of calculation the cyclic field should display Fpl Press to toggle if this is not the case 3 Turn the right outer knob clockwise to place the cursor over the flight plan number As you cycle through the flight plans the first and last waypoints Of Apt VOR NDB WT USR ACT NAY FPL CAL SET OTH each flight plan will be displayed I figure 4 81 E 4 Once you have selected the desired flight plan move the cursor to the groundspeed field on line 2 Select your estimated groundspeed for the trip Move the cursor to the fuel flow rate field and use the right inner knob to select the desired value Remember that this can be in any units you desire as long as it s per hour but the same fuel units must carry through the calculations 7 Move the cursor to the fuel reserve requirement field and enter the desired value As you do watch the calculation of fuel required on line 4 change figure 4 82 Figure 4 82 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET y 1
181. g source the Other 11 OTH 11 page displays wind informa tion directly 4 5 8 THE CALCULATOR 8 CAL 8 PAGE The CAL 8 page is used to determine the times of sunrise and sunset for any waypoint in the published or user data base To calculate sunrise sunset times 1 Select the CAL 8 page figure 4 93 The first time the CAL 8 page is selected after the APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH KLN89 B is turned on the way Figure 4 93 point identifier defaults to the current destination the date defaults to the current date and the time zone defaults to the system time zone Each of these three items may however be changed The sunrise and sunset are displayed at the bottom of the page NOTE The time zone initially displayed is the system time zone This is the same as the one on the SET 2 page Note that the time zone displayed may not be appropriate for the waypoint shown For 4 29 y 1910207 gt C U N 9 e Chapter 4 e a A e c e a c ET e 3 T lt Advanced GPS Operation example the waypoint shown could be KLAX and the time zone may be Eastern Standard Time EST Make sure you select the appropri ate time zone for the displayed waypoint 2 Turn on the cursor crsa 3 lf desired select another waypoint identifier using the right inner and outer knobs Press Figure 4 94 to
182. g without card 4 46 PC interface kit 2 5 Subscriptions and update options 2 9 Updating 2 4 2 8 User waypoints 3 56 VORs 3 53 Data entry 3 13 Date and time 3 4 3 60 Display format 3 8 Default first waypoint identifier character 3 15 Deleting Airport and user waypoint remarks 3 64 Approach 5 9 Direct To operation 3 35 4 12 Flight plans 4 7 SID 5 33 STAR 5 33 User waypoints 3 64 Waypoints from flight plan 4 6 Departure time 3 40 Desired track DTK 3 38 3 41 4 4 4 12 A 1 Direct To operation Canceling Direct To 3 35 4 12 NAV 1 page in Direct To 3 34 3 36 Procedures 3 32 Recenter D bar 3 35 Using with flight plan operation 4 11 VNAV 4 17 Waypoint alerting 3 35 Disable turn anticipation 4 10 Display brightness 3 9 Distance 3 9 A 1 DME arcs 5 22 Duplicate waypoint page 3 15 1 4 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide E Editing Flight plans 4 5 4 6 SID 5 33 STAR 5 33 Emergency nearest airport 3 26 Enter ENT button and prompt 3 10 3 11 Entering Airport remarks 3 50 User waypoint remarks 3 57 Waypoint identifiers 3 13 Estimated position error EPE 3 62 Erase See Delete ESA See Minimum en route safe altitude ETA Estimated time of arrival 3 40 ETE Estimated time en route 3 38 3 41 F f final approach fix identifier suffix 5 9 FAF final approach fix 5 2 5 9 Fence 5 9 Flight plans Activating 4 4 Active flight plan 4 1 4 8 Adding waypoints 4 5 Creating 4 1 Deleting 4 7 Deleting waypoints 4 6 Direct to o
183. gt 9 e cD 9 2 e gt c gt JJ 5 31 Approaches and SID STARs 3 Turn the cursor on by pressing the esr and if necessary rotate the right outer knob until the flashing cursor is over the desired STAR With the cursor over Fi 5 39 AQNA figure 5 39 press MM ME 4 The KLN 89B will now ask which transition you want to use For this example select INK figure 5 40 and press LENT APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV 5 n some cases the STAR proce Figure 5 40 dure requires you to select a specific runway To select a specific runway move the cursor over the desired runway and press In this example the STAR does not require a specific runway so the KLN 89B skips this step VOR NDB INT USR FPL Z 6 KLN 89B now presents list 2 of waypoints that make up the APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH STAR figure 5 41 Review Figure 5 41 these waypoints if desired and then press to load the STAR into the active flight plan 7 The KLN 89B will then add the STAR procedure before the air APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH port reference point in the active 1 flight plan figure 5 42 If the airport reference point is not included in the active flight plan then the KLN 89B will ask to add this waypoint to the active flight plan NOTE It is not possible to load a SID or
184. gure 4 3 displayed on the screen figure 4 4 If a mistake was made and the wrong waypoint identifier was entered press and begin again If no mistake was made but the waypoint identifier just entered isn t in the data base a page allowing creation of a user defined waypoint will appear on the screen Refer to section 4 6 for instructions on how to create a user defined waypoint Chapter 4 A e N ou C e ca APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 4 4 4 2 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Advanced GPS Operation 8 Press again to approve the waypoint page being displayed The cursor will move automatically to the second APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH waypoint position figure 4 5 Figure 4 5 NOTE A small number of waypoints are stored in the data base as fly over waypoints These waypoints are associated with SID STAH procedures Fly over means that for some reason the governing agencies have decided that it is important to fly directly over the way point instead of being able to cut the corner by using turn anticipation see section 4 2 2 In these cases the KLN 89 B will present a waypoint type identification page figure 4 6 Simply select the way in which the waypoint is intended to be used with the right outer knob and press ent If the SID STAR APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH choice is selected the KLN 89
185. he KLN 89 B screen using the procedure below To change the selected course in OBS mode 1 If the KLN 89 B is not in OBS mode select OBS mode by pressing the button If already in OBS mode turn on the cursor Lensn The cursor VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH will automatically be turned Figure 4 121 on over the OBS selected course field figure 4 121 a 2 X 2 Turn the right inner knob until Ilse the correct selected course is displayed figure 4 122 3 Turn off the cursor ensn NOTE The above procedures apply to ORS 02 software For ORS 01 software the cursor does not automatically come on when the OBS mode is selected and must be activated by using the but ton In addition the OBS selected course field is not the default cursor location The right outer knob must be used to position the cur sor over this field after it has been turned on APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 4 122 4 There is no automatic leg sequencing or turn anticipation 5 The Minimum Enroute Safe Altitude ESA displayed on the ALT 1 page is the highest MSA sector altitude between the present position and the active waypoint See section 3 12 Other way points in the active flight plan do not affect the ESA 4 37 y 1910207 gt C U N 9 e Chapter 4 e a L e c e a C5 ce cS lt
186. he character SIUM UE WG LET VINE FL and the right outer knob moves Figure 4 104 the cursor around VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL Figure 4 103 3 Spell out the rest of the identifier using the right inner and outer knobs figure 4 105 VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL Figure 4 105 second line over User Pos L L 2983 figure 4 106 VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL Figure 4 106 4 32 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Advanced GPS Operation 5 Press mr The display will change to a format like figure 4 107 VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 6 Use the right inner knob to select Figure 4 107 N for north or S for south figure 4 108 T Use the right outer knob to move VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH the cursor and the right inner Figure 4 108 knob to select the proper numbers to complete the latitude entry figure 4 109 VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET P mr Th ill 8 ress e cursor will move Figure 4 109 to the longitude field 9 Enter the longitude in the same manner as the latitude figure 4 110 VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 4 110 2 E p c 10 Press to approve this position The cursor will automatically turn off figure 4 111 VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 4 111 4 6 3 CREATING A WAYPOINT REFERENCED FROM ANOTHER WAYPOINT y 1e1deu gt
187. he other page APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 4 43 y 1910207 gt co U N T 9 e Chapter 4 e a A e c e a c ET e 3 T lt Advanced GPS Operation The endurance in hours and minutes The endurance is calculat ed based on the amount of fuel remaining after subtracting out the reserve you entered on the OTH 7 or the OTH 8 page from the present fuel on board The range which is the distance nautical miles or kilometers that could be flown based on the endurance calculated above and the present groundspeed The fuel efficiency in nautical miles or kilometers per fuel unit gal lons in this case which is the groundspeed divided by the present fuel flow 48 3 THE OTHER 9 OTH 9 PAGE The OTH 9 page displays rate of fuel flow It has two formats depending on whether the aircraft is a twin engine fig ure 4 135 ora single engine figure NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL Figure 4 135 484 THE OTHER 10 OTH 10 PAGE The OTH 10 page displays the amount of fuel used If interfaced with the DI ARNAV fuel management computer Figure 4 136 this page displays dashes since the ARNAV system does not output fuel used There are two formats depending on whether the aircraft is a twin engine figure 4 137 or a single engine figure 4 138 NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL Figure 4 137 4 9 THE AI
188. he right outer knob All the page types are listed across the front panel directly under the display and the bar will always be over one of them For example let s say you NAV page figure 3 36 and you wanted to turn to a SET page You would look at the list and see that the SET pages are three APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT CAL SET OTH places to the right of the NAV pages Figure 3 36 3 12 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation Therefore turning the right outer knob three clicks clockwise will get you to the SET pages figure 3 37 The annunciator bar and the page labels Work kind of like a map to get APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET you from one page type to another Figure 3 37 The page type selection wraps around from Other OTH to Airport APT that is the knob has no mechanical stops Once you have selected the desired page type using the right outer knob you may select the page number by rotating the right inner knob Lets use an example to make sure you understand You are presently viewing the APT 2 page and you wish to view the NAV 3 page Rotating the right outer knob 6 six clicks clockwise will display the NAV page that you last viewed we ll say the NAV 2 page Turning the right inner knob one click clockwise or three clicks counterclockwise will bring you to the NAV 3 page Got it NOTE In this Pilot s Guide the right smaller knob is assumed to be in the in po
189. hen all of an airport s runway information does not fit on one page additional APT 4 pages are used to display the data Remember that a inserted between the page type and the number APT 4 in this case is used to indicate that there is more than one Airport 4 page APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Line 1 The ICAO identifier see section 2 3 of the airport an arrow precedes the identifier if it is the active waypoint To the right is the runway designation for the first runway on the page NOTE In some parts of the world runway numbers are based on true runway heading rather than magnetic These runways are prevalent in northern Canada where there is a large magnetic varia tion gradient For these runways a symbol separates the two runway numbers example 1 T 22 Line 2 The runway length for the first runway listed on the page the runway surface type and the type of lighting blank if none Runway surface abbreviations HRD Hard surface TRF Turf GRV Gravel CLY Clay SND Sand DRT Dirt SNW Snow ICE Ice SHL Shale MAT Steel mat 3 48 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation Runway lighting Abbreviations L Sunset to sunrise LPC Pilot controlled lighting LPT Part time or on request lighting Lines 3 4 Runway information for the next shortest runway if any in the same format as lines 1 and 2 In the event that there is no runway information for an airport the fol
190. identifier Fpl Is Full Flight Plan is Full Appears when an attempt is made to add a new waypoint to the active flight plan FPL 0 when it already contains 20 waypoints and the first waypoint is part of the active leg Change the active waypoint or delete another waypoint before adding any more waypoints tinvald Add Invalid Add Appears when an attempt is made to add a new waypoint into the approach Approach procedures must be flown as they are stored in the data base tinvald Del Invalid Delete Appears when an attempt is made to delete an approach waypoint Individual approach waypoints cannot be deleted you must delete or replace the entire approach Invald Ent Invalid Entry Appears when you attempt to enter data which is not a valid entry For example trying to enter a date of 30 FEB 95 C 1 k gt lt c s DBeSS IN LAU B URBES e c oo x lt 5 SS lt pe o Appendix No Act Wpt No Active Waypoint Appears when you attempt to activate the OBS mode if there is no active waypoint To have an active way point a flight plan must be activated or a Direct To must be initiated No Apr In Fpl No Approach in Flight Plan Appears when an attempt is made to arm the GPS approach mode when there is no approach loaded into the active flight plan Load an approach into the flight plan before trying to arm the
191. ife of three to five years It is highly recom mended that the battery be replaced every three years at an authorized Honeywell Service Center 2 8 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Data Base 2 6 DATA BASE UPDATE SERVICE OPTIONS The following tear out page can be used for ordering Americas Atlantic and Pacific data base update services from Honeywell The forms may be mailed or FAXed for your convenience 2 9 DATA CURSOR CARD BUTTON ET 72 1707 VOR NDB INT ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH ON OFF MESSAGE ALTITUDE DIRECT TO ENTER RIGHT KNOB BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON INNER KNOB OBS NEAREST CLEAR RIGHT BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON OUTER KNOB Figure 3 1 KLN 89 B Controls basic GPS Operation KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation 3 BASIC GPS OPERATION 3 1 COVERAGE AREA The KLN 89 B was designed to provide worldwide navigation cover age from North 74 latitude to South 60 Latitude figure 3 2 Outside this area magnetic variation must be manually entered as discussed in section 4 10 Operation Outside the Primary Coverage Area See section 2 2 for the data base geographical regions ES s Ne pae UC E E ls 2 p WE cS dT oU NUS A rq Figure 3 2 KLN 89 Navigation Coverage Area 3 2 TURN ON AND SELF TEST Well it S time to get down to business and a
192. ifier for Orlando Executive Airport is KORL while the VOR identifier is ORL The prefix letter for Canada is C and for Alaska is P da e cS co c po G Chapter 2 NOTE There are several exceptions in Alaska In many cases air ports with three letter identifiers receive the prefix P but there are many that don t The most reliable method of determining an Alaska airport identifier is to look it up from the airport name or city See sec tion 3 7 4 Selecting Waypoints by Name or City Incidentally you can program the KLN 89 B to default to a certain letter such as K when you are entering a waypoint identifier See section 3 4 2 Data Entry to learn about this handy feature Not all airport identifiers receive the prefix letter Airport identifiers which are combinations of letters and numbers do not apply to the prefix rule Examples of airport identifiers not using the prefix are 3C2 7TX6 and M33 So remember if you are entering or looking for an airport identi fier that is all letters no numbers then it will begin with a K prefix in the contiguous U S a P in Alaska in some cases or a C in Canada If there are numbers in the identifier then a prefix is not used For other areas of the world the airport iden tifier stored in the KLN 89 B data base is identical to how it is charted 2 4 UPDATING THE DATA BASE The information stored in the data base would eventually become
193. ight outer knob clockwise to move the cursor to the from waypoint in the upper right corner of the screen figure 4 75 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 4 75 4 Enter the desired identifier for the from waypoint and press Lt The waypoint page for the iden tifier you just entered will be displayed If it is the correct one press again NOTE On either of the two waypoint fields on this page you can select your present position To do this press while the cursor is on the desired waypoint field figure 4 76 The results will only be displayed Figure 4 76 when your KLN 89 B is receiving a valid position or if you happen to be in the Take Home mode see section 4 11 Using the Take home Mode VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 5 Move the cursor to the groundspeed field on line 2 6 Select your estimated ground APT VOR INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH speed for the trip figure 4 77 Figure 4 77 7 With the cursor over the to waypoint enter the desired identi fier figure 4 78 and press Lev J lt 8 Move the cursor to the fuel flow VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL rate field and use the right inner Figure 4 78 knob to select the desired value figure 4 79 Remember that this can be in any units you desire as long as it s per hour but the Sales same fuel units must carry through the calculations INT USR ACT NAV FPL Figure 4 79 9 Move the cursor to the
194. ime C D T Lom ad 00121900 49 218 9 VOR NDB INT USR ACT FPL CAL SET Z M 3 61 tS co x s OS 2 gt co Basic GPS Operation 3 14 THE OTHER OTH PAGES 3 14 1 DETERMINING THE STATUS OF THE GPS SIGNALS The Other OTH 1 and OTH 2 pages may be viewed at any time to determine the status of the GPS receiver and the GPS satellites being received This includes which satellites are being tracked the satellites health the signal strength for each of these satellites the elevation of each satellite above the horizon the azimuth of each satellite referenced to your present position the estimated position error and the present GPS derived altitude The GPS receiver in the KLN 89 B is capable of using signals from up to eight satellites to determine its position A valid position may be determined using as few as four satellites alone or three satellites with a valid electronic altitude input However four satellites alone or three satellites with an altitude input do not necessarily ensure that navigation can take place The satellites must be positioned relative to your location such that sufficient geometry exists to determine an accurate position The satellite constellation geometry is continually changing as each satellite rises travels across the sky and eventually sets relative to your position The GPS satel
195. ime air data information They are independent of the CAL 4 CAL 5 CAL 6 and CAL 7 pages which rely on manual pilot inputs to calculate air data information 49 1 THE OTHER 11 OTH 11 PAGE Without a fuel management system this becomes the OTH 7 page The follow ing information is displayed figure 4 139 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 4 139 TAS True airspeed the true speed of an aircraft through the surrounding air mass Mach Mach number the ratio of the true airspeed to the speed of sound at a particular flight condition If a compatible source of heading infor mation is provided to the KLN 89 B the following wind data is also displayed figure 4 140 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 4 140 Tailwind Tailwind component of the wind Headwind Headwind component of the wind Wind The wind direction relative to true North and the wind speed 4 45 y 1e1deu gt C U N 9 e Chapter 4 e a L e c e a C5 ce cS lt Advanced GPS Operation 4 9 2 THE OTHER 12 12 PAGE Without a fuel management system this becomes the OTH 8 page The follow ing information is displayed figure 4 141 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 4 141 SAT Static air temperature the actual temperature of the surrounding air mass TAT To
196. in the waypoint identifier field In order for there not to be an active waypoint there is no Direct To waypoint and there are no waypoints in Flight Plan 0 3 9 1 INITIATING A DIRECT TO Now that you know the ground rules let s go ahead and try some practical examples First let s say we wanted to fly directly to Wexford County Airport in Cadillac Michigan Its ICAO identifier is KCAD To fly Direct To a waypoint procedure 1 1 Press The Direct To page is displayed figure 3 100 The cursor will already be on A waypoint identifier may or may VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL 2 2 a V not be displayed it doesn t matter Figure 3 100 at this point 2 Rotate the right inner knob to select the first character of the SHZ desired waypoint s identifier in this case a K figure 3 101 VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL Remember to enter the K C Figure 3 101 or P prefix for certain airports in North America if required see section 2 3 ICAO Identifiers 3 Turn the right outer knob one click clockwise to move the flash ing portion of the cursor over the second character position figure 3 102 4 Rotate the right inner knob to select the second character of VOR NDB INT USR NAV FPL the identifier figure 3 103 Figure 3 103 2 lt VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL Figure 3 102 Ld Wit C LN 3 33 C D T Lam ad 00121900
197. index will help you quickly find important procedures at a glance The list is alohabetized by action words TO SEE PAGE Activate a waypoint in OBS mode without changing the Selected uisa ate 4 40 Activate one of the previously created numbered flight plans 4 4 Add a waypoint to a flight plan 4 5 Add an individual waypoint in the SID or STAR procedure 5 33 Adjust the minimum display brightness 3 9 Calculate distance time and ESA for a flight plan 4 23 Calculate distance bearing and time from waypoint to waypoint 4 22 Calculate fuel requirements for a flight plan 4 25 Calculate fuel requirements from waypoint to waypoint 4 23 Calculate sunrise sunset times 4 29 Calculate the density altitude 4 27 Calculate the pressure altitude 4 26 Calculate the true airspeed TAS 4 27 Calculate the winds alolft 4 28 Cancel Direct To operation 3 35 Change a Cycle u usc
198. information a way to access the flight plan and a graphic presentation of the pre sent position relative to the flight plan waypoints You will find this page to be a good friend while performing GPS based non precision approaches 5 1 G Jeydeu 9 e cD 9 2 e gt c m 2I a Chapter 5 N a amp o cO a e a a e p Approaches and SID STARs NOTE There are some approach procedures in the world that are not suited for the operational characteristics of the KLN 89B These procedures are not included in the data base Therefore it is not possible to use the KLN 89B for these approaches It is good pre flight practice ensure that the KLN 89B contains anticipated procedures for the flight In addition to the two course modes Leg and OBS described in sec tion 4 7 there are also two approach modes These are approach arm and approach active The status of the approach mode is indi cated on an external switch annunciator In most installations the external annunciator will indicate ARM for the approach arm mode and approach active will be annunciated by ACTV The main differ ence of these modes from the normal en route mode is that the integrity monitoring is set to a tighter level Another difference between these modes and the en route mode is that the CDI scale factor will usually change to 1 0 NM for ARM and will always
199. inner knob to cycle through the waypoints in the active flight plan FPL 0 which are still in front of the aircraft s position When another valid waypoint in the flight plan is entered on the ALT 2 page the aircraft s lateral flight path is not altered This means that you may program a vertical flight path having an ascent or descent point that begins prior to the flight plan leg containing the selected VNAV waypoint 4 4 3 VNAV FROM THE NAV 1 PAGE The NAV 1 page can be configured to display the VNAV status This means that you will not have to change pages as much to see what altitude you should be at You will still need to set up the VNAV problem by using the ALT 2 page as described in section 4 4 1 To use the NAV 1 page to view the VNAV status 1 Setup the VNAV situation on the ALT 2 page 2 Select the NAV 1 page Turn on the cursor and use the right outer knob to move the cur sor to the cyclic field on the bottom line figure 4 66 Figure 4 66 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 4 20 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Advanced GPS Operation 4 This field displays bearing to active waypoint radial from active waypoint or VNAV status Press the button until the VNAV status is displayed figure 4 67 Turn off the cursor Figure 4 67 The NAV 1 page will now display VNAV status until you change the page configuration to display something else If the VNAV problem has not been defined yet then Vnv Off will be
200. is actually in progress the VNAV status will change to Inactive 4 19 y 1910207 gt co U N 9 e Chapter 4 a L e c e co a C5 ce 3 cS lt Advanced GPS Operation Additionally you may force the VNAV into Inactive status by chang ing the vertical speed to 0000fpm To reactivate VNAV after changing a parameter simply move the cursor to the vertical speed field or select the new desired vertical speed If you make a change to the groundspeed during the time VNAV is active VNAV will remain active and a new vertical speed will be cal culated and displayed If you wish to change this vertical speed go ahead and do so and the VNAV descent or ascent will be modified for the new parameters CAUTION Advisory VNAV operation will only be accurate if the altimeter baro correction is kept updated If advisory VNAV is used it is a good idea to update the altimeter baro set on the ALT page each time you make a change to the aircraft s altime ter setting 4 4 2 VNAV FOR FLIGHT PLAN OPERATION Using the vertical navigation function when flying via a flight plan is virtually the same as for the previous Direct To example The ALT 2 page will initially contain the identifier for the active to waypoint in the flight plan You may program the vertical ascent or descent refer encing this waypoint or you may use the right
201. is page is first viewed the reference waypoint is the 3 56 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation nearest VOR to the user waypoint The reference waypoint may be changed by the pilot However once you leave this page and come back the reference waypoint reverts back to a nearby VOR Line 3 The magnetic radial from the reference waypoint to the user waypoint Line 4 The distance from the reference waypoint to the user way point 3 11 5 4 The User 3 USR 3 Page See figure 3 165 Line 1 The identifier of the user defined waypoint an arrow precedes Figure 3 165 the identifier if it is the active waypoint APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Lines 2 4 The pilot entered remarks for the user waypoint Three lines of 14 characters each are available for the remarks Up to 100 waypoints may include remarks Letters numbers hyphens and Spaces may be used in the remark If no remarks have been entered for the user defined waypoint line 2 will display Remarks To enter a user defined waypoint remark on the USR 3 page e D T Lam ad 1 Turn on the cursor and move it until the cursor fills line 2 of the screen figure 3 166 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 3 166 uoljeiadg 49 218 9 2 Select the desired character if any and move the cursor to the next character on the line figure 3 167 lt Repeat step 2as necessary APT VOR NDB
202. isco International KSFO will be used To select a SID 1 Select KSFO on one of the airport pages figure 5 31 If you are operating from an active flight plan you can use the ACT 7 page for KSFO by scanning through INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL the active flight plan see section Figure 5 31 4 2 3 2 If not already displayed rotate the right inner knob until the APT 7 page appears as in figure 5 32 Make sure that SID is displayed in the upper right corner of the M M M LM display This will allow the selec Figure 5 32 tion of SID procedures 3 Turn the cursor on by pressing esr and rotate the right outer knob until the flashing cursor is gt 2 over PORTES figure 5 33 With the cursor over press TREES RURAL ENT Figure 5 33 4 The KLN 89B will now ask which runway that you will be using For this example select RWO1B figure 5 34 and press Lev The B stands for Both so selecting INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL RWO1B means it is applicable to Figure 5 34 runways 1L and 1H 5 30 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Approaches and SID STARs 5 The last bit of information needed to define this SID is the transition This example uses the Fellows transition To select the Fellows transition move the cursor down to FLW figure 5 35 and press 2 Pd APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL Figure 5 35 ENT J 6 KLN 89B now presents a list EP of waypoints that make up the
203. ith the way point closest to the aircraft s present position displayed first and the waypoint farthest from the aircraft displayed last To view the rest of the choices rotate the right outer knob clockwise Doing so will move the flashing cursor over waypoints two three and then will cause the waypoint list to scroll so that the other way points in the list may be seen Z HES 2 To select the desired waypoint move the cursor over the appropriate choice figure 3 53 S Press and the display will APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET change to the waypoint page for Figure 3 53 the selected waypoint figure 3 54 Press again to approve the waypoint page APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET Figure 3 54 3 16 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation 3 4 4 CYCLIC FIELDS On many of the KLN 89 B pages there are cyclic fields which are pre ceded by a carat A cyclic field is one that you as the pilot can select from two or more options For exam ple in figure 3 55 the field gt 135 To Figure 3 55 magnetic bearing to Austin VOR is a cyclic field In this case the second option is the magnetic radial from Austin VOR to present position APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH To change a cyclic field 1 Turn on the cursor by pressing the button figure 3 56 VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET Figure 3 56 2 Using the right outer k
204. l come on over the Alert field If OFF is displayed turn the right inner knob to select ON figure 4 52 Figure 4 52 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 2 Select a warn altitude deviation by positioning the cursor over the Warn field Use the right inner knob to select the desired value figure 4 53 It is selectable in one hundred foot increments from 200 feet up to 900 feet or in ten m increments from 60 meters to 2 0 meters Normally you will use the same value all the time so you only have to enter this the first time you use altitude alerting The recommended warn altitude devia tion is 300 feet or 100 meters Rog oy APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 4 53 4 14 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Advanced GPS Operation 3 If necessary adjust the altitude alert audio volume by moving the cursor to the Volume field Use the left inner knob to select a desired volume between 00 and APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 99 The larger the number the Figure 4 54 louder the volume figure 4 54 4 Press The Altitude 1 ALT 1 page will be displayed with the cursor over the altimeter baro set field NOTE The altimeter baro set units may be changed between inch es millibars and hectopascals on the SET 8 page see section 3 3 5 Use the right inner Knob to update the altimeter baro setting if required figure 4 55 6 Press the button again to Figure 4 55 move o
205. l management computer continuously sends the rate of fuel flow and the amount of fuel remaining to the KLN 89 B The KLN 89 B con tinuously calculates the aircraft s distance groundspeed and estimated time enroute ETE to the destination waypoint The fuel required to reach the destination waypoint is the ETE multiplied by the current rate of fuel flow The amount of fuel that will be remaining at the destination is the amount of fuel presently remaining minus the fuel required to reach the destination 4 4 y 191020 gt co U N 9 e Chapter 4 e a L e c e a c e 3 cS lt Advanced GPS Operation CAUTION The KLN 89 B fuel calculations are based on the pre sent rate of fuel flow the present groundspeed the present distance to destination along the programmed route and the amount of fuel presently remaining Before take off the fuel flow computer must be properly initialized with the amount of fuel on board FOB the aircraft For some Shadin fuel computers without display units you may enter the initial FOB during the KLN 89 B Turn on and Self Test see section 3 2 Since many factors influ ence the required amount of fuel to reach the destination it is the pilot s responsibility to view the fuel management pages often to check for any significant changes Some factors affecting the amount of fuel required are pow
206. l that you may find useful from time to time Be sure to keep this Pilot s Guide handy with you in the airplane It is designed to fit easily in the glove box or in the seat pocket The KLN 89 B is very simple to operate but the Pilot s Guide can sure be of help to you One last thing Don t get so involved in learning to use the KLN 89 B that you forget to fly the airplane Be careful and remember to keep a close eye out for other aircraft Introduction KLN 89 B SNEAK PREVIEW If you absolutely can t wait to use your KLN 89 B until you ve read this Pilot s Guide this section is for you This page will teach you just enough to get going and then learn by doing This operational pre view assumes the KLN 89 B has been properly installed the unit was previously operational in the same general geographical loca tion and that no peripheral equipment interfaced with the KLN 89 B such as external HSIs CDls autopilots moving map display etc is to be used at this time If you are using this operational preview in flight do so only in good VFR conditions and only with an alternate means of navigation including pilotage available to cross check position 1 Turn the unit on with the On Off knob the small knob in lower left hand corner 2 For a few seconds the Power On Page is displayed while the unit runs a self test Afterwards the Self test Page is displayed If the KLN 89 B is receiving an altitude from an encoding
207. ld be required 9 The published missed approach procedure for this approach is to make a climbing left turn to 5700 feet and proceed direct to the TXO VOR In this case TXO will be the default direct to waypoint 5 16 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Approaches and SID STARs when is pressed This is the desired waypoint so press to confirm the waypoint and proceed direct to the VOR NOTE If ATC gives you instructions for a missed approach that are different from the published missed approach procedure it is always possible for you to select a different direct to waypoint than the default direct to waypoint 10 As the aircraft approaches TXO you will need to select OBS mode to stop waypoint sequencing and define the inbound course for the holding pattern If you do not select the OBS mode before the aircraft is within 4 NM of the holding point then the KLN 89B presents a message reminding you to select the OBS mode NOTE f another attempt at the approach is desired after holding it is necessary to manually change the active waypoint When the FAF and the missed approach holding point are at the same place then the KLN 89B will automatically change the active waypoint to the FAF when you change from OBS to LEG Make sure to make this change as soon as possible to ensure you get into the approach active mode G 13 dey9 9 e cD 9 2 e gt ce m Chapter 5 N
208. lites are not in geosynchronous orbits positioned over the same spot on earth at all times like some television communication satellites with which you may be familiar Rather the GPS satellites are in orbits that allow them to circle the earth about two times each day A representative OTH 1 page is shown in figure 3 183 The OTH 1 page displays the GPS receiver state and the system s estimate of the posi tion error expressed in nautical miles or kilometers Figure 3 183 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH The GPS state is indicated on line 1 The possibilities are INIT initialization ACQ acquisition TRAN transition NAV navigation NAVA navigation with altitude aiding NAV D navigation with data collection DEGRD navigation with position degradation FAILR receiver failure 3 62 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation In the initialization state the GPS receiver is in the process of initializing itself collecting information such as the date time and last present position Next the receiver collects data from its own memory to determine which satellites should be visible After completing the initialization process the receiver begins the acquisition process During this time the visible satellites are being acquired and data is obtained from them The transition state indicates an adequate number of satellites for navigation has been acquired and is being tracked but no position data can yet be prod
209. llows the user to specify the magnetic variation APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 4 142 4 47 y 1910207 gt co U N 9 e Chapter 4 e a L e c e a C5 ce cS Advanced GPS Operation 4 11 USING THE TAKE HOME MODE It is very likely that the KLN 89 B will become your best friend in the cockpit As with any good friend you may need some time to get well acquainted This will allow you to utilize it to the maximum extent A great way to get to know the KLN 89 B is to use it outside the airplane using what we call the take home mode There are products available which allow you to use the KLN 89 B at your home office or hotel to have get acquainted time in the take home mode for instance the Commander 2000 from Lone Star Aviation It is also helpful to do flight planning and perform data base updates outside the airplane perhaps with a home personal computer For more information on the Commander 2000 or to place an order con tact Lone Star Aviation Corp 1306 Tatum Drive Arlington TX 76012 Phone 81 7 548 7768 FAX 817 261 8692 When the KLN 89 B is in the take home mode it performs as if it is receiving adequate satellite signals to determine its position It displays the latitude and longitude of its last known position or of whatever posi tion it is initialize
210. longitude of the If the NDB is being viewed as part of the nearest NDBs list see section 3 8 1 the NDB 1 page format will differ as follows see figure 3 158 Line 1 After the NDB identifier the number designating the NDB s position in the nearest NDB list is displayed In figure 3 158 DFI is the nearest NDB APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 3 158 Lines 3 4 In place of the latitude longitude line 3 is blank and line 4 displays the magnetic bearing to or the magnetic radial from the NDB and the distance Placing the cursor over the radial bearing field and pressing toggles between radial from and bearing to station 3 11 3 2 The NDB 2 Page See figure 3 159 Line 1 The NDB identifier preceded by an arrow if it is the active waypoint APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Line 4 The magnetic bearing to or the magnetic radial from the NDB and FEQ na the distance Placing the cursor over the radial bearing field and pressing toggles between radial from and bearing to station 3 54 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation 3 11 4 INTERSECTION PAGES The Intersection pages contain low altitude high altitude approach and SID STAR intersections as well as outer markers and outer com pass locators The Intersection pages for waypoint ELVIS figures 3 160 and 3 161 are used as an example of what is displayed for Intersection pages 3 11 4 1 The Intersection
211. lowing is a listing of the KLN 89 B data base contents AIRPORTS Identifier Name City State or Country Use type if heliports military or private Latitude and Longitude Elevation Runway numbers lengths surfaces and lighting Fuel availability Approach types available precision non precision or none Radar approach departure environment Time difference relative to UTC Communication frequencies ATIS Clearance delivery Tower Ground control Unicom Multicom Approach IFR Departure IFR Class B Class C TRSA CTA TMA VFR Center when used for approach Arrival Radar Director AWOS automatic weather observing station ASOS automatic surface observation system AAS aeronautical advisory service AFIS aerodrome flight information service ATF aerodrome traffic frequency CTAF common traffic advisory frequency RDO radio frequency MF mandatory frequency Ramp control PCL pilot controlled lighting o a ea a L nd c Chapter 2 2 2 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Data Base VORs Identifier Name Frequency Latitude and Longitude Magnetic variation NDBs Identifier Name Frequency Latitude and Longitude Note Outer Compass Locators are stored as Intersections Intersections low altitude high altitude SID STAR approach and outer markers Identifier Latitude and Longitude SID STAR Approach Procedures KLN 89B only All compatible pilot nav SID STAR procedures Non
212. ly AUTO chooses the smallest map scale that will display the active waypoint and if there is one the waypoint after the active waypoint Choosing the AUTO scale factor means there is one less item for you to worry about This is espe cially helpful when conducting non precision approaches using the Pt voR NOB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH MENGI Figure 3 128 Aside from changing the map range scale all other customization of the map display is done from the menu Notice that when you turn on the cursor cask the Menu field appears above the range scale Turn the right outer knob one step counter clockwise to move the cursor over the Menu field figure 3 128 and press APT VOR NOB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Lent The menu now pops up on the Figure 3 129 screen figure 3 129 3 42 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation To select the desired NAV 4 orienta tion you must first select the menu then use the right outer knob to posi tion the cursor over the map 3TESE orientation field figure 3 130 Rotate APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH the right inner knob to display NT for Figure 3 130 North DTKT for desired track up figure 3 131 TKT for actual track up or HDGT for heading up The heading up selection is not presented q 2 as a choice if heading is not provided APT VOR USR EU NAV FPL CAL SET OTH to the KLN 89 B If the cursor is _ located a field other tha
213. message acts as a reminder to make sure the KLN 89B is using the correct barometric pressure If the barometric information is not correct then the integrity monitoring provided by the KLN 89B will not be as good as it could be Press to bring up the ALT 1 page and verify that the barometric pressure is correct NOTE If the KLN 89B is interfaced with a compatible air data com puter that provides the correct barometric pressure to the KLN 89B then the previous message is not displayed and it is not necessary to update the barometric pressure At this time the KLN 89B will smoothly change the CDI scale factor to 1 0 NM The external approach annunciator installed in the aircraft will indicate that the approach is in the ARM mode 5 10 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Approaches and SID STARs JEPPESEN amp MAY 94 13 2 ATIS Arrival 133 8 SOCAL Approach R 225 044 124 5 045 08 128 5 090 222 124 9 LOS ANGELES Tower North Complex 133 9 South Complex 120 95 Cwound North Complex 1 21 65 Helicopter l 19 8 LOS ANGELES CALIF LOS ANGELES INTL WOR or GPS Rwy 25L R vor 113 6 LAX MSA 4 South Complex 121 75 LAX VOR KLAX Apt Eley 126 A 1920 aay UE 1889 6 to FITON inbnd a 2043 V via SLI R 341 7 8 amp inbnd on q mr nic LAX R 068 3 2 4000 i mary 0950 Nose NI SANTA MONICA S gt x 608A AS7S 1173 Santa Monica i amp
214. more than ten waypoints Press ALT To Set Baro This message appears when the approach mode is armed Press the button to update the barometric pressure for proper integrity monitoring Press GPS APR for NAV This message appears after the NAV flag has been set due to a RAIM problem while the KLN 89B is in the approach mode By pressing the GPS APR button the KLN 89B may be able to restore navigation information so that you can conduct a missed approach based on navigation information provided by the KLN 89B RAIM Not Available APR Mode Inhibited Predict RAIM on OTH 3 This message appears when integrity monitor ing RAIM is predicted to not be available at either the FAF or the MAP The KLN 89B will not go into the approach active mode until conditions improve Turn to the OTH 3 Other 3 page to perform a RAIM prediction The OTH 3 page will give an indication of how long it will be until RAIM is available so that the approach can be flown using the KLN 89B see sec tion 5 1 9 on performing a RAIM prediction RAIM Not Available Cross Check Position This message appears when there are not enough received GPS satellite signals to compute integrity RAIM Cross check the position of the aircraft with other means of navigation every 15 minutes to verify that the position is still accurate RAIM Position Error Cross Check Position This message appears when the KLN 89B has detected a problem with one of the satellites
215. n 3 Press the button until this line changes to the CDI scale field figure 4 129 4 Rotate the right inner knob to select the desired CDI scale factor Figure 4 129 figure 4 130 The valid choices are 5 0 NM 1 0 NM and 0 3 NM or 9 3 km 1 9 km and 56 km 5 If desired you may press to switch the display back to the graphical CDI Figure 4 130 6 Turn off the es The CDI scale factor change is complete NOTE The KLN 89B will automatically select a scale factor while in one of the approach modes When the KLN 89B selects a CDI scale factor it is not possible to select a scale factor that is less sensitive than what the KLN 89B has automatically chosen For example as you will see in the next chapter the approach arm mode usually has a scale factor of 1 NM While in the approach arm mode it is not possible for you to select the 5 NM scale factor This is to ensure proper operation of the approach modes 4 8 THE FUEL MANAGEMENT PAGES Certain models of fuel management computers manufactured by Shadin Company ARNAV Systems Inc and Sheltech Ltd May be interfaced with the KLN 89 B The primary benefit of having the KLN 89 B interfaced with a real time fuel management computer is that the system can continuously compute the amount of fuel required to reach the destination and the amount of fuel that will be on board upon reaching the destination The concept is the following The fue
216. n APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH figure 4 32 Figure 4 32 4 2 2 TURN ANTICIPATION AND WAYPOINT ALERTING Prior to reaching a waypoint in the active flight 4 plan the KLN 89 B will provide navigation along a curved path segment to ensure a smooth transi a tion between two adjacent legs in the flight plan i That is the CDI or HSI left right deviation will be referenced to the dashed line in figure 4 33 This feature is called turn anticipation The transition course is based upon the aircraft s actual ground speed and the amount of course angle change between the two legs The KLN 89 B automati wert cally sequences to the next leg after passing the midpoint in the transition segment Figure 4 33 y 1e1deu gt co U N T 9 e 4 9 Chapter 4 A e N ou C e ca Advanced GPS Operation Approximately 20 seconds prior to the beginning of turn anticipation the arrow preceding the active waypoint identifier will begin flashing on the FPL 0 page and on any Navigation page or waypoint page displaying the active waypoint identifier figures 4 34 and 4 35 This is called waypoint alerting If an external waypoint alert annunciator is mounted in the aircraft this annunciator will begin flashing at APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH the same time Figure 4 35 44 2 lt
217. n Sanderson Inc Reduced for illustrative purposes Figure 5 22 the approach into the flight plan figure 5 23 This waypoint is named using the same conven ZEE tion discussed earlier 2 VOR NDB INT USR FPL CAL SET Figure 5 23 NOTE If the present radial from the reference VOR is outside of the defined arc then the KLN 89B will default to the beginning of the arc 13 dey9 gt T D cD N 9 v N 4 I JJ o 5 25 Approaches and SID STARs CAUTION The KLN 89B does not take into account the geome try of the active flight plan when determining the arc intercept point This point is defined solely on the present radial and the defined arc distance from the reference VOR For this reason it is better to delay selecting approaches that contain DME arcs until the aircraft is closer to the destination 4 With the cursor over ADD TO FPL 0 Press t The approach will be loaded into the active flight plan just like any other approach would be 5 After the approach is loaded into the flight plan the KLN 89B may give the message Redundant Wpts In FPL Edit En Route Wpts As Necessary This message is given because very often it will be necessary to edit the active flight plan to ensure that proper waypoint sequenc ing occurs Examine the flight plan and if practical observe the NAV 4 page to make sure that the sequence of wa
218. n approach is performed with a KLN 89B For this reason the KLN 89B Other OTH 3 page allows the pilot to enter a time and location and the GPS receiver will predict if RAIM will be available to shoot the non precision approach See section 5 1 9 for more information about the RAIM prediction capability GPS XPRESS CARD 8 CHANNEL RECEIVER The KLN 89 and KLN 89B use an Honeywell GPS receiver known as the GPS Xpress card It was dubbed this way because it is identi cal in size to an everyday credit card and its faster acquisition time than previous single channel designs The GPS receiver has eight parallel channels which means each channel can continuously track a satellite for continuous tracking of up to eight GPS satellites The parallel receiver design has several advantages Excellent performance during high dynamic conditions high velocity and or acceleration e Improved position acquisition time also known as time to first fix over single channel designs Improved position accuracy The ability of the GPS receiver to perform the RAIM calcula tions is enhanced without degrading position tracking F 4 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Index KLN 89 B INDEX A Abbreviations Airport names 3 25 3 45 ARTCC FIR D 8 Canadian Province D 2 Communication frequencies 3 49 Country D 2 GPS receiver state 3 62 Other abbreviations D 17 State D 1 Time zones 3 5 ACT Active waypoint pages 4 11 Activating Numbere
219. n the ma b ered orientation field then the DTKT TKT or HDGT annunciation is replaced with the actual value The 123 dis played in figure 3 132 shows how the actual track is displayed when the cursor is not over the map orientation field If a heading input is available to the KLN 89 B then heading up is usually the best map orientation to select Otherwise actual track up display is usually preferred for use in flight However the track up display is only usable when the aircraft is moving 2 knots or more so the North up display may be a good choice if you are stationary APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 3 132 Notice that in both the North up format and the desired track up for mat the aircrafts position is depicted by a diamond In the actual track up format and the heading up format the aircraft s position is depicted by an aircraft symbol You may choose to have nearby airports VORs and special use air space SUA displayed on the moving map To do so use the pop up menu by turning on the cursor and selecting Menu When the menu is first displayed the cursor will be on the SUA selec tion field Rotate the right inner knob to select on or off When SUAs are selected the five nearest SUAs are displayed However they will not be displayed on map range scales larger than 160 NM 300 km opecial use airspace areas are displayed regardless of your altitude relative to the airspace The nearest SUA fea
220. n this field The time used for the RAIM prediction will be the current ETA to the destination airport or the MAP This time is automatically updated by the KLN 89B so there is usually no need to enter a value If you are making a RAIM calculation for planning purposes it is also possible to enter a time in this field An important point about this time is that the time used for RAIM prediction is always in the future and limited to 24 hours from the present time For example if the time is now 19 30 and the time entered for the ETA is 18 30 then the prediction will be made for the next day not one hour ago 5 27 13 dey9 gt 9 e cD 9 2 e gt c gt JJ o er d o cO a e a a e p Chapter 5 Approaches and SID STARs To perform a manual RAIM calculation 1 Turn the left outer and inner knobs to select the OTH 3 page 2 Press The cursor will be over the RAIM Dest field Enter the desired waypoint identifier by using the inner and outer knobs just like you do for any other waypoint entry 4 Once the desired waypoint identifier is entered figure 5 27 press r Press again the waypoint information is correct APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL Figure 5 27 5 The cursor will now be over the ETA field Use the inner knob to enter the desired hour Note that the current time zone is displ
221. n to the ALT 2 page fig ure 4 56 Only line 2 of the ALT 2 page is used for altitude alert ing The remainder of the ALT 2 page is used only for vertical nav igation or VNAV see section 4 4 The first altitude displayed Figure 4 56 on line 2 is the current indicated altitude 9000 feet in figure 4 56 With the proper altimeter baro setting the indicated altitude should be the same as the aircraft s actual altimeter APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL NOTE There may be some difference less than 100 feet between the indicated altitude and the aircraft s actual altitude if the altitude input to the KLN 89 B is from an altitude encoder because these encoders only provide altitude in 100 foot increments y 1e1deu 7 The cursor should be positioned on the selected or to altitude field figure 4 56 Enter the selected altitude using the right APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL inner knob figure 4 57 Figure 4 57 gt C U N 9 e 8 Press to return to the page which was previously displayed Notice that when you are on an ordinary non altitude page the first press of the button brings up the ALT 1 page the sec ond press of brings up the ALT 2 page and the third press takes you back to the original page 4 15 Chapter 4 e a L e c e a C5 ce cS lt Advanced GPS Operation 9 The aural al
222. nbound course the Leg mode will again need to be selected so that proper approach operation and way point sequencing will occur NOTE It is mandatory that the unit be in LEG mode with the FAF as the active waypoint before crossing the FAF to activate the approach active mode and change to 0 3 NM scale factor The CDI scale fac tor changes from 1 0 NM to 0 3 NM over the two miles to the FAF Delaying the switch from OBS to Leg mode compresses the scale KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Approaches and SID STARs factor change This makes the transition more abrupt If the switch from OBS to Leg is delayed too long it will not be possible for the KLN 89B to change to the approach active mode 7 When the aircraft is 2 NM from the FAF the KLN 89B will verify that the proper GPS integrity is available If integrity monitoring is available for the approach then the KLN 89B will change to the Approach Active mode This will be annunciated on the external approach status annunciator as well as on the KLN 89B The CDI scale factor will also start to change from 1 0 NM to 0 3 NM 8 Normal waypoint alerting will occur as the aircraft passes the final approach fix The leg from the final approach fix to the missed approach point will become active and the CDI scale factor will remain at 0 3 NM If the AUTO scale factor was selected on the NAV 4 page then the scale factor will zoom in on the airport as the aircraft gets closer and closer to the mis
223. nd 104 auy uosiapues uasaddap uorssiunad YM pasnpolday 03 JON 1533513 51HTHH lv Podl DNI NOSu3ONYS N 53e43I Gi E 4 NOFEVSTAVN E Ry 001 850M f 2 3 SYNOI oF ENS IEN 25 an n VES Ey Se DN WN amp 1 UI M11954 1j se jeq EN St Soe ANIA O lu Apuay pasig JE x 6 D or 660M l tl ZEN P ar T l VOL 3 1100 2 C WN OF Bul 420M 14 sellen 8755 100 P 00 ZEN S Ns de SO UP 393425 asang yawosdde jeuly Q 94 104284 B bE LU ud TER f OSL 560M S41 ZEN e y UN uL TON unos Buipue OT 1 a 2 alos Nov 9011 y B O0IM S L ZEN r i s z NOLO gt S HH a nc SW 551 05 ad a EES WOM ZZ ZEN esz EV EN Mp 6l IS ANI S92 ZEN w 0009 St za 18 AGNYW 1000 0 S SI 2 219 Sy COE Be 2907 sii 60 ADS at I osa y x peni aw 4 8 1S 660M 6 82 ZEN 0006 ie 55019 01 i22dx3 SWIM OSE Y sialoguny 9 Mans 98 860A 197 Zeit i ore Om OOS ZEN e 602 Py Te NUOD 3NJlIgV i 774 CEN A x u pu 3 Bu puer Va
224. nd 6 in section 3 2 Turn On and Self Test The initial position is usually set during turn on and self test but if for some reason it is necessary to update the position after the power on sequence then use the fol lowing steps Remember if acquisition time is not important then it is not necessary to update the time date or position To initialize the position from the SET 1 page 1 If the cursor is not on the screen figure 3 62 press the button to bring it on the page over the INIT POS field figure 3 63 2 Using the right inner and outer Figure 3 62 knobs enter the identifier for the airport where you are presently located or the identifier of a navaid or other airport which is close to your present position figure 3 64 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Any waypoint in the data base which is within 60 miles is accept able but the closer the better Remember if you are entering an airport identifier that is all letters 3 no numbers then it will begin with a prefix In the contiguous APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH U S a P in Alaska in some Figure 3 64 cases in others the prefix is not added or a C in Canada If there are numbers in the identifier then a prefix is not used Outside the contiguous U S Alaska and Canada use the airport identifiers as they are charted C D T Lom ad 00121900 49 218 9 APT VOR NDB INT USR A
225. nd the missed approach holding point are at the same place then the KLN 89B will automatically change the active waypoint to the FAF when you change from OBS to LEG Make sure to make this change as soon as possible to ensure you get into the approach active mode 5 1 9 APPROACH PROBLEMS Very rarely there will be a problem with the integrity of the GPS sys tem while you are conducting non precision approaches with the KLN 89B In some cases the KLN 89B will determine that there will not be sufficient integrity monitoring for the leg between the FAF and the MAP or RAIM is not currently available In these cases the KLN 89B will not go into the approach active mode and will present the follow ing message RAIM Not Available APR Mode Inhibited Predict RAIM on OTH 3 In these cases you will not be able to finish the approach because there is insufficient integrity monitoring The OTH 3 Other 3 page provides a means for you to predict when RAIM will be available To perform a RAIM prediction on the OTH 3 page two pieces of infor mation are needed The first is the location that the prediction will be for and the second is the time for the prediction The destination waypoint will by default be the missed approach point of an approach loaded in the flight plan If there is no approach in the flight plan then the default waypoint is the last waypoint in the active flight plan Of course it is possible for you to enter any way point i
226. ndspeed field on line 4 5 Select your estimated ground speed for the trip As you change it the estimated time en route ETE calculation will be updated Figure 4 74 figure 4 74 APT VOR NDB ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 4 5 2 THE CALCULATOR 2 CAL 2 PAGE The CAL 2 page is for calculating fuel requirements for a trip To use these pages you need to have a good idea what the typical fuel flow rate for your aircraft is This information can often be found for given cruise power settings in a performance section of the Pilot s Operating Handbook for the aircraft The units for fuel are not specified on this page but the units of time are always hours This means that you can use gallons per hour pounds per hour kilograms per hour etc Like with the CAL 1 page the fuel calculations can be done from waypoint to waypoint including present position or for one of your flight plans To calculate fuel requirements from waypoint to waypoint 1 From the CAL 2 page turn on the cursor rs8 It will appear over a cyclic field that either displays Wpt waypoint to waypoint or Fpl flight plan 2 For this type of calculation the cyclic field should display Wpt Press to toggle if this is not the case 4 25 y 1910207 gt co U N T 9 e Chapter 4 e A e cO ou C e ca Advanced GPS Operation 3 Turn the r
227. ner knob to select the second character figure 3 43 6 Use the right outer and inner knobs in this manner until the NT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET complete waypoint identifier is Figure 3 42 displayed figure 3 44 Note that you may not have to enter the last characters of the identifier because each time you enter a character the KLN 89 B offers you the first identifier in the data base beginning with the charac ters you have entered oD eet re a lt INT USR FPL CAL SET Figure 3 43 N 9 ca 7 f Ent is flashing on the left side of the screen then press This will prompt the KLN 89 B to VOR INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET display a waypoint page for the Figure 3 44 waypoint identifier you just entered figure 3 45 8 Verify the waypoint information displayed and then press again to approve the waypoint page The display will return to Figure 3 45 the page previously displayed figure 3 46 Often you will find yourself entering airports that begin with the same character over and over again In sec tion 2 3 you learned how the KLN INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET Figure 3 46 3 14 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation 89 B uses ICAO identifiers which means that many U S airport identifiers begin with the letter K Also many airport identifiers in Europe
228. ng a valid position or if you happen to be in the Take Home mode see section 4 11 5 With the cursor over the to waypoint enter the desired identifier figure 4 71 and press XE twice The bearing will be dis played on line 2 and the distance will be displayed on line 3 Figure 4 71 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Use the right outer knob to move the cursor over the groundspeed field on line 4 Select your estimated groundspeed for the trip As you change it the estimated time en route ETE calculation will be updated figure 4 72 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 4 72 4 22 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Advanced GPS Operation To calculate distance time and ESA for a flight plan 1 From the CAL 1 page turn on the cursor It will appear over a cyclic field that either displays Wpt waypoint to waypoint or Fpl flight plan 2 Forthis type of calculation the cyclic field should display Fpl Press to toggle if this is not the case 3 Turn the right outer knob clockwise to place the cursor over the flight plan number As you cycle through the flight plans the first and last waypoints of each flight plan will be displayed along with the total distance and the minimum enroute safe altitude for the flight plan figure 4 73 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 4 Once you have selected the Figure 4 73 desired flight plan move the cursor to the grou
229. ng pattern requires OBS mode DME arc 13 dey9 gt e 9 e cD 9 2 e gt c m 2I a 5 5 Chapter 5 N er d o cO a e a a e p Approaches and SID STARs Transition to the approach active mode This mode change is automatic and occurs at position C in figure 5 1 when e the aircraft is 2 NM from the FAF and the approach mode is armed the LEG mode is selected the aircraft is heading towards the FAF the FAF or a co located IAF FAF is the active waypoint the KLN 89B confirms that adequate integrity monitoring is available to complete the approach RAIM is available at FAF amp MAP If any of these conditions are not met the KLN 89B will not transition to the approach active mode and a missed approach will be required if the conditions do not change before reaching the FAF If all of these conditions are met then the CDI scale factor will start to change to 0 3 NM and the external annunciator will indicate ACTV D At the FAF position D in figure 5 1 the CDI scale factor will be at 0 3 NM and will remain at this scale factor until you manually cancel the approach mode by either pressing the external GPS APR button to change to the ARM mode by initiating a direct to operation or by changing to OBS mode WARNING It is not approved to conduct the final portion of the approach unless the
230. nitialize position page 3 19 SET 2 Date Time Mag Var page 3 62 SET 3 Database update page 2 7 SET 4 Turn Anticipation page 4 10 SET 5 Default 1st character page 3 15 SET 6 Nearest APT criteria page 3 28 SET 7 SUA Alerting page 3 70 SET 8 Baro setting page 3 58 SET 9 Altitude Alerting page 4 14 SET 10 Voltage BUS Alerting page 3 67 SET 11 Display Brightness page 3 9 1 9 Index Set date and time 3 3 3 60 SID standard instrument departure Changing 5 33 Deleting 5 34 Editing 5 33 Example 5 34 Loading 5 30 Selecting 5 30 SID STARs 5 29 Simulator Take Home mode 4 48 Sneak Preview of operation ii SNR Signal to noise ratio 3 63 Software status 3 66 Special use airspace 3 29 3 68 STAR standard terminal arrival route Changing 5 33 Deleting 5 34 Editing 5 33 Example 5 36 Loading 5 30 Selecting 5 32 State abbreviations D 1 Step down fix 5 13 5 25 Sunrise Sunset 4 29 Surface runway 3 48 System components 1 1 1 2 T Take Home mode 4 48 Take Home warning page 3 2 Terminal waypoints 5 7 Time Actual 3 4 3 40 3 61 4 26 Departure 3 40 ETA 3 40 ETE 3 38 3 41 Flight 3 40 Setting 3 4 3 61 Time to first fix 3 18 Time zones 3 5 Timer 4 25 TMA 3 47 To From indicator 3 37 Track See Actual Track Transitions SID STAR selecting 5 30 5 32 1 10 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Index True airspeed 4 27 4 28 4 45 Turn anticipation 4 9 Turn on 3 1 Turn on page 3 2 Trip planning 4 21 4 23 U Upda
231. nob move the cursor over the cyclic field you wish to change figure 3 57 3 Press the button to change the cyclic field figure 3 58 VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET Notice that repeated presses cycle you through the choices In this case there are only two so works like a toggle switch e D T Lom ad CD 00121900 49 218 9 VOR NDB INT USR FPL CAL SET 3 5 MESSAGE PAGE Figure 3 58 Whenever the KLN 89 B wants to get your attention the message prompt a large on the left side of the screen begins flashing figure 3 60 If you have a remote message annunciator in your aircraft it will also Figure 3 60 begin flashing at that time You should view the message at your earliest opportunity because the unit may be alerting you to some sit uation of immediate concern to its condition or to your flight A description of each possible message is included in Appendix B of this Pilot s Guide VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL d N e A ca oD p pe a X lt basic GPS Operation To view a message 1 Press the mse button The MSG page will appear and show the new message figure 3 61 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 3 61 NOTE It is possible that several messages are displayed at one time on the Message page The newest message appears first and the rest in reverse chronologi
232. ns are charted in terms of mean sea level MSL Therefore if you are flying either above or below an SUA area you won t be inconvenienced with nuisance alert messages However if the actual lower limit of an SUA is charted in terms of an altitude above ground level AGL then it is stored in the KLN 89 B as all altitude below the upper limit of the SUA If the actual upper limit of an SUA is charted in terms of AGL it is stored in the KLN 89 B as unlimited If the altitude input to the KLN 89 B is pressure altitude from an alti tude encoder or air data computer then you must manually update the KLN 89 B with an altimeter setting baro correction in order to receive accurate SUA alerting You may easily update the altimeter setting by pressing the button to display the Altitude 1 ALT 1 page figure 3 202 The right inner knob is used to change the altimeter setting When the setting IS complete press twice to return to the page previ Figure 3 202 ously in view CAUTION Failure to keep the altimeter baro setting updated Will result in inaccurate special use airspace alerting If this fea ture is used it is a good idea to update the altimeter baro setting on the ALT 1 page each time you make a change to an aircraft s altimeter setting NOTE f there is no altitude input to the KLN 89 B all altitudes will be regarded as being within the boundary of the SUA area Only the outer lateral boundaries are stored
233. nt pages for that waypoint figure 4 41 gt C U N 9 e 3 Pulling the knob back out will allow further scanning of the waypoints in the active flight plan 4 2 4 COMBINING DIRECT TO AND FLIGHT PLAN OPERATION It is very common when using flight plan operation to use the Direct To function to proceed directly to a waypoint which exists in the active flight plan For example after takeoff on an IFR flight plan it is 4 11 Chapter 4 e A e cO ou C e ca Advanced GPS Operation common to receive vectors in the terminal area and then be given a clearance direct to the first point in the flight plan that was filed The KLN 89 B as an advisory navigation source makes this kind of operation very easy to accomplish Whenever you do a Direct To operation to a waypoint which is in the active flight plan FPL 0 the system will provide navigation to the waypoint and then automatically resume navigation along the flight plan when the Direct To waypoint is reached Waypoints which exist prior to the Direct To waypoint in the active flight plan are bypassed Of course the active flight plan will never be resumed if the Direct To operation is to a waypoint which is not in the active flight plan Any of the several methods previously described for initiating Direct To oper T ation may be used although the one below is
234. o setting on the Altitude ALT 1 page Press twice more to return to the page previously displayed It s so easy you have no excuses for not keep ing the baro setting updated CAUTION The altitude alerting feature will only be accurate if the altimeter baro correction is kept updated If altitude alerting Is used it is a good idea to update the altimeter baro set on the ALT 1 page each time you make a change to the aircraft s altimeter setting NOTE The altitude alerting feature can be disabled in the KLN 89 B at the time of installation so that these features are not selectable by the pilot When this has been done the SET 9 page displays Feature Disabled 4 16 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Advanced GPS Operation 4 4 ADVISORY VNAV OPERATION The KLN 89 B s advisory vertical navigation VNAV feature allows you to program a descent or ascent path and then provides you with an advisory altitude to fly that will provide guidance along the vertical path For example you can program the VNAV to provide descent guidance so that you arrive at your active waypoint or a waypoint in the active flight plan at an altitude that you specify The KLN 89 B will alert you of when to start the descent and display the advisory altitudes to fly throughout the descent 4 4 1 VNAV FOR DIRECT TO OPERATION The Altitude 2 ALT 2 page is used to program the KLN 89 B for vertical navigation To get to the ALT 2 page from any non altitude page p
235. obs in the normal manner to define the desired waypoint 4 Press to display the waypoint page for this identifier If the waypoint is correct then press a second time to confirm the waypoint page The new waypoint is added to the waypoints that make up the SID or STAR procedure To delete an individual waypoint in a SID or STAR procedure 1 Use the right knobs to select the FPL 0 page 2 Rotate the right outer knob to place the cursor over the waypoint to be deleted 3 Press The letters DEL delete will appear to the left of the identifier and a question mark will appear to the right of the identifier 4 If this is the desired waypoint to delete then press Let If it is not the desired waypoint press Ce NOTE Adding waypoints to or deleting waypoints from SID or STAR procedures does not change the way that they are stored in the pub lished data base To change or delete an entire SID or STAR procedure from the active flight plan 1 Use the right knobs to select the FPL 0 page 2 Turn the cursor on by pressing the esr Move the cursor over the SID or STAR procedure header by using the left outer knob 5 33 13 dey9 9 e cD 9 2 e gt ce m Chapter 5 N er d o cO a e a a e p Approaches and SID STARs 3 With the cursor over the procedure header press to change the SID
236. obsolete if there wasn t some means to update it For example new airports open navaids can move or change frequency communica tion frequencies can change and on and on 2 4 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Data Base Additionally by FAA regulation you are required to have a current data base in order to use the KLN 89B for a non precision approach The data base is contained in a small card which plugs into the left side of the KLN 89 B front panel It is designed so that there are two ways for the user to easily keep the data base current The first is to electronically update the data base by means of a 3 5 inch diskette supplied by Honeywell and an IBM compatible personal computer This method does not have to involve removing the KLN 89 B from the aircraft s instrument panel A jack usually mounted in the air craft s instrument panel provides a means of interfacing the KLN 89 B with the computer via an interface cable The diskettes are not returned to Honeywell The second method of data base update is to remove the old card and insert a current card This method involves returning the old card to Honeywell Every 28 days Honeywell receives new NavData M information from Jeppesen Sanderson This information is processed and down loaded onto both diskettes and data base cards Honeywell makes these two types of update services available to you in a choice of several subscription or random update programs See section 2 6 for
237. ode 1 The course deviation indicator CDI sensitivity is plus and minus five nautical miles full scale This applies to the CDI on the NAV 1 page as well as any external CDIs or HSls interfaced to the KLN 89 B If the CDI or HSI has five dots left and right of the center position then each dot represents one nautical mile of deviation The course is defined by the active waypoint and the selected magnetic course A course to or from the active waypoint may be selected 4 36 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Advanced GPS Operation 3 The course selection is normally made by changing the selected course displayed on an external indicator such as an HSI or CDI When this is done the pilot must verify that the proper course has been selected by confirming the digital selected course readout displayed on the KLN 89 B In the OBS mode the selected course is always displayed as part of the mode annunciation on line 3 of the left side of the KLN 89 B screen In many installa tions two or more navigation sources can be displayed on one indicator In these situations there is a switch in the aircraft panel which will determine what navigation source is displayed For the KLN 89 B to properly read the external indicator the KLN 89 B must be the displayed navigation source on the external indicator When the KLN 89 B is not the displayed navigation source on the external indicator it is possible to change the selected course from t
238. ontain information pertinent to a specific airport such as name city state elevation and direction and distance relative to the aircraft s present position The units of measure for displayed information can be changed using the SET 8 page Refer to section 2 12 for details on this page The altimeter barometric setting can be set to inches of Mercury mil libars mB or hectopascals hP Altitude airport elevation and runway lengths can be set to feet ft or meters m Finally distances and velocities can be set to nautical miles nm and knots kt or kilo 3 8 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation meters km and kilometers hour k h Changing any of the units of measure only affects the information displayed on the unit It does not affect any of the data output by the unit The brightness of the display is controlled by a photocell on the KLN 89 B front panel The brighter the light level the brighter the display will be The minimum nighttime brightness is set at the factory to a level that is appropriate for most installation In some cases however it may be desired to change the minimum brightness level e g an unusually dark cockpit environment The SET 11 page controls the minimum brightness To adjust the minimum display brightness 1 Select the SET 11 page figure 3 25 and turn on the cur sor c58 The display brightness has a range of zero 0 to 9 with zero being the dimmest 9 b
239. or off use the right knobs to select the VOR 1 page figure 3 79 The VOR waypoint in view is not important APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 2 Press and then make sure Figure 3 79 the right inner knob is pushed to the in position 3 With the right outer knob move the cursor over the first character in the VOR name which is being displayed figure 3 80 Figure 3 80 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 4 Change this first character to an in this case figure 3 81 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 3 81 3 24 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation 5 Move the cursor one space to the right and select the second char acter A figure 3 82 6 Select the third character P ist VOR NDE TINT UGA AGT NAVEL OAL SET OTH figure 3 83 Up pops Napoleon and its identifier 7 Turn off the cursor lesr so you can view other pages We Will now use another example to APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH show how we may enter a few char _ acters and then scan through all the nue aaa waypoints in the data base beginning with those characters Let s use this method to find La Guardia Airport in New York City To select an airport by scanning the airport name 1 With the cursor off and the right inner knob in the in position select the APT Airport 1 page The airport displayed at this time is not imp
240. ortant S 2 Turn on the cursor ce Qo o c Move the cursor over the first BO character in the airport name NDB INT USR NAV FPL CAL SET 5 figure 3 84 Figure 3 84 4 Change the first character to an L 5 Move the cursor one place to the right and select an A NDB INT ACT NAV FPL figure 3 85 Figure 3 85 6 Now move the cursor one place to the right and pull the right inner knob out The rest of the airport name field will flash figure 3 86 7 Turn the right inner knob clock Figure 3 86 wise scanning through La Crosse Municipal La Grande Union airport and several others Eventually you will arrive at LA GUARDIA figure 3 87 By turning off the cursor c8s8 pushing the right Figure 3 87 NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL 3 25 gt gt 5 5 2 gt co Basic GPS Operation inner knob in and turning it you can leaf through the remainder of the pages for La Guardia NOTE This same method may be used with the name of the city where the airport is located There are a few changes made to names in order to accommodate the KLN 89 B display and to make the names easier to find 1 Names which are too long to fit on the display are abbreviated The first six characters are usually exactly correct but the following are exceptions North Northern East Eastern etc uses N E Southeast Northwest etc
241. per approach operation and automatic leg sequencing For best performance the change back to Leg mode should be made before the aircraft is 2 NM from the FAF NOTE It is mandatory that the unit be in LEG mode with the FAF as the active waypoint before crossing the FAF to activate the approach active mode and change to 0 3 NM scale factor The CDI scale fac tor changes from 1 0 NM to 0 3 NM over the two miles to the FAF Delaying the switch from OBS to Leg mode compresses the scale factor change This will make the transition more abrupt If the switch from OBS to Leg is delayed too long it will not be possible for the KLN 89B to change to the approach active mode 5 he rest of this approach would be flown using the same steps as presented in section 5 1 5 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Approaches and SID STARs 5 1 7 EXAMPLE APPROACH ON AIRPORT NAVAID Another common type of approach is an approach that is based on an on airport navaid These could be either VOR or NDB approach es An example of this type of approach is the VOR RWY 24 approach to Bowman airport in Louisville Kentucky Figure 5 19 The airport identifier for this airport is KLOU JEPPESEN 21 JAN 94 Q3 3 LOUISVILLE KY Aris 112 2 BOWMAN STANDIFORD Approach ik 124 5 VOR Rwy 24 GPS von 112 2 BQM MSA 8QM VOR KLOU Apt Elev 547 BOWMAN Tower 119 5 Ground 121 8 LOUISVILLE Radio 119 5 when Twr inop NABB VOR Clark
242. peration in flight plans 4 11 Editing 4 5 4 6 Flight plan 0 active flight plan 4 1 4 8 Inverting 4 5 Operating from the active flight plan 4 8 Rules for use of 4 8 Storing active flight plan as a numbered flight plan 4 7 Viewing distance ETE ETA and DTK of flight plan waypoints 4 4 4 12 Viewing waypoint pages for active flight plan 4 11 VNAV operation 4 20 Flight time 3 40 Fly by Fly over waypoints 4 3 FPL 0 page 4 8 FPL 1 25 pages 4 1 Frequencies for airport communications 3 49 I 5 Index Index FSS frequencies 3 31 Fuel availability 3 47 Fuel management pages 4 41 Fuel on board 4 41 Fuel planning 4 23 4 41 G GPS Coverage area 3 1 Panel controls 3 0 Receiver status 3 62 3 63 Theory of operation F 1 GPS APR switch annunciator 3 66 5 1 Groundspeed 3 8 H h missed approach holding point identifier suffix 5 8 Heading 3 43 4 29 4 45 Holding pattern 5 18 5 22 5 27 How To Index iv HSI 1 1 initial approach fix identifier suffix 5 9 IAF initial approach fix 5 9 Selecting 5 5 ICAO identifiers 2 4 Initial position 3 6 3 19 Initialization 3 3 3 18 Initialization page 3 3 INT page Intersection page 3 55 Integrity monitoring See RAIM Intercept DME arc 5 22 Moving the intercept point 5 24 Interfaces 1 1 Intermediate fix 5 7 Intersections 3 55 Inverting flight plans 4 5 J Jeppesen charts 5 8 K KA 92 antenna 1 1 Kilometers 3 58 1 6 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s G
243. point If there are more than three waypoints you can see the rest of the list by turning on the cur sor e8s8 and turning the right outer knob to scroll through the list To delete a waypoint remark from the OTH 5 page 1 Turn on the cursor and position it over the desired waypoint figure 3 194 If there are more X than three airports with remarks you will have to scroll the cursor WAS 058 O a down the list Figure 3 194 2 Press Pun The KLN 89 B will ask if you wish to delete that remark figure 3 195 3 Press to approve the deletion E a M 7 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET Figure 3 195 3 14 3 VIEWING THE KLN 89 B SOFTWARE STATUS THE OTH 6 PAGE The OTH 6 page figure 3 196 shows the software status of the KLN 89 B Fi 3 196 host computer line 2 the GPS ee receiver line 3 and the Database Cartridge line 4 3 15 REMOTE MOUNTED ANNUNCIATORS The KLN 89 B has outputs capable of driving two remote annunciator lights waypoint alert and message Although these annunciators are optional it is desirable to have them mounted in the pilot s normal scan area so that these annunciators are easily seen A typical annunciator is shown in figure 3 197 however actual annunciation abbrevi Figure 3 197 ations and configurations may be different The remote waypoint alert annunciator is on whenever waypoint alerting is occurring See sections 3 9 3 Waypoint Ale
244. pproach procedures for the air port The IAPs are listed in alphabetical order If there are more than three IAPs the final one in the list is on line 4 of the screen To scan through the IAPs that are not in view turn on the cursor and turn the right outer knob clockwise The different types of IAPs with examples are GPS 27 GPS approach LORAN 4 LORAN approach RNAV 2L RNAV approach TACAN 24 TACAN approach VOR 15 Straight in VOR approach VOR B Circling VOR approach VOR D 31 VOR DME approach NDB 26 Straight in NDB approach NDB D Circling NDB approach NDB D 35 NDB DME approach 3 52 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation 3 11 2 VOR PAGES Two pages of information may be displayed for each VOR in the KLN 89 B Sample VOR pages are shown in figures 3 154 through 3 156 3 11 2 1 The VOR 1 Page See figure 3 154 Line 1 The VOR identifier preceded Figure 3 154 by an arrow if it is the active waypoint To the right of the identifier is the frequency of the VOR in megahertz Line 2 The name of the VOR Lines 3 4 The latitude and longitude of the VOR If the VOR is being viewed as part of the nearest VOHs list see section 3 8 1 the VOR 1 page format will differ as follows see figure 3 155 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Line 1 After the VOR identifier the Figure 3 155 number designating the VOR s position in the nearest VOR list is displayed In figure 3 155 MEX is the second nea
245. precision approaches except localizer LDA Localizer Directional Aid SDF Simplified Directional Facility approved for GPS overlay use Includes all public GPS only approaches Miscellaneous Air Route Traffic Control Center ARTCC and FIR frequencies Flight Service Stations location of points of communication and associated frequencies Minimum Safe Altitudes Special Use Airspace SUA boundaries Prohibited Restricted Alert Class B Class C CTA TMA TRSA Caution Danger MOA Training Warning 500 USER DEFINED WAYPOINTS Identifier Latitude and Longitude 2 3 Z saydey eL D rmja D UJ 9 e L1 Data Base 2 3 ICAO IDENTIFIERS Waypoints are stored in the KLN 89 B database almost exclusively by their ICAO identifiers ICAO International Civil Aviation Organization is an internationally accepted reference for the data In almost all cases the proper ICAO identifiers may be taken directly from Jeppesen Sanderson or NOS aeronautical charts Airport identifiers in the contiguous United States Alaska and Canada are special cases in the ICAO system Many airport identi fiers for these areas have four letters beginning with a prefix letter that corresponds to the geographic area in which it is located The prefix letter for the contiguous U S is K Thus the identifier for Dallas Fort Worth International Airport is KDFW not DFW which would be identical to the VOR identifier Likewise the ident
246. quen cies to use for transmit and receive and also the name of the VOR through which you are communicat APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH ing figure 3 97 Figure 3 97 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 3 31 N 9 ca c p a lt basic GPS Operation 3 8 4 Viewing the Nearest Center Frequencies The KLN 89 B also stores in its data base the low altitude boundaries of each of the ARTCC Centers The KLN 89 B determines the proper Center to contact and the appropriate frequencies to use for the aircraft s present position Pressing the button and selecting the option will display this information to you figure 3 98 Next time you wish to obtain VFR flight following or communicate with Center for any reason you have a quick way to get a frequency for establishing contact Appendix D contains a list ing of Center abbreviations used on the CTR page NOTE Frequencies for Area Control Centers are displayed on the CTR page for some areas of the world 3 9 DIRECT TO OPERATION The button is used to initiate Direct To operation navigation from your pre sent position direct to your destination When is pressed the Direct To APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH page will be displayed with a flashing cursor over a waypoint identifier figure Figure 3 99 3 99 The waypoint identifier
247. r more details on the Take Home mode APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 7 Select the NAV 2 page When the KLN 89 B reaches the NAV ready status and is therefore able to navigate the NAV 2 page will display the present position Verify that the latitude and longitude or the waypoint radial and distance display of present position are correct 3 20 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation 3 7 SELECTING AND SCANNING WAYPOINTS There are five types of waypoints airports VORs NDBs intersections and user waypoints Waypoints in the published data base fall into one of the first four types You can create up to 500 user waypoints to supplement the waypoints in the data base see section 4 2 1 to create a user waypoint There are three methods you may use to select a specific waypoint for viewing You may enter the waypoint s identifier directly you may scan through the waypoint identifiers in alohabetical order or you may enter the waypoint s name If the waypoint is an airport you may also select it by entering the city where the airport is located 3 7 1 SELECTING WAYPOINTS BY IDENTIFIER The most direct way of selecting a specific waypoint is to simply enter the waypoint s identifier directly on the appropriate waypoint page type APT for example Let s use Chicago O Hare International Airport whose identifier is KORD as an example To select a waypoint by identifier from a waypoint page 1 U
248. rado All satellite data which is collected by the other ground stations is assimilated and analyzed at Colorado Springs Based on these analyses ephemeris updates such as sys tem clock corrections are sent uplinked to the satellites through radio transmitters at the ground stations These ground stations are located at Kwajalein west of Hawaii in the central Pacific Ocean Diego Garcia in the Indian Ocean and Ascension in the south Atlantic Ocean As an owner of a GPS system you can now claim to be a certified member of the GPS User Segment GPS has many users and uses and more are being dreamed up all the time Not only are aircraft using GPS navigation so are military systems and personnel boaters hikers and surveyors Personal automobiles and transport trucks use Intelligent Transportation Systems or ITS to find their destinations and track their movements Some biologists attach GPS receivers to animals to monitor their movement and migration patterns Geologists even use GPS to track the movement of glaci ers and to analyze plate tectonics movements of the Earth s crust What an exciting new technology as we move into the 21st Century RAIM Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring RAIM is a function that every IFR certified GPS receiver must continuously perform to assure an accurate position One characteristic of the GPS Space and Control Segments is that they can t instantly fix a satellite if it begins sending
249. rder to create additional user defined waypoints it will first be necessary to delete existing user defined waypoints on the OTH 4 page C 2 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Appendix APPENDIX D ABBREVIATIONS STATE ABBREVIATIONS ABBREVIATION STATE AK Alaska AL Alabama AR Arkansas AZ Arizona CA California CO Colorado CT Connecticut DC District of Columbia DE Delaware FL Florida GA Georgia IA lowa ID Idaho IL Illinois IN Indiana KS Kansas KY Kentucky LA Louisiana MA Massachusetts MD Maryland ME Maine MI Michigan MN Minnesota MO Missouri E MS Mississippi MT Montana lt NC North Carolina North Dakota NE Nebraska NH New Hampshire NJ New Jersey NM New Mexico NV Nevada NY New York OH Ohio OK Oklahoma D 1 Appendix STATE ABBREVIATIONS Cont d OR Oregon PA Pennsylvania RI Rhode Island SC South Carolina SD South Dakota TN Tennessee TX Texas UT Utah VA Virginia VT Vermont WA Washington WI Wisconsin WV West Virginia WY Wyoming CANADIAN PROVINCE ABBREVIATIONS ABBREVIATION PROVINCE AB Alberta BC British Columbia MB Manitoba NB New Brunswick NF Newfoundland NS Nova Scotia NT amp NU Northwest Territory ON Ontario 2 4 PE Prince Edward Island zx PQ Quebec S SK Saskatchewan s Yukon COUNTRY ABBREVIATIONS ABBREVIATION COUNTRY AFG Afghanistan AGO Angola AIA Anguilla Isl ALB Albania ANT Antarctica Netherlands Antilles Aruba D 2 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot
250. re 4 87 Figure 4 87 3 Use the right outer knob to move the cursor to the first Temp field and then use the right inner and outer knobs to enter the outside air temperature degrees Celsius figure 4 88 The first digit of the temperature is either if the temperature is above zero or if the temperature IS Sart VOR T USAT NA below zero For maximum Figure 4 88 accuracy the static air tempera ture should be entered This is the temperature of air without the effect of heating due to the aircraft s movement through the air For the airspeeds of most piston aircraft the difference between static air temperature and the observed air temperature or total air temperature is negligible The density altitude Den is now displayed NOTE If a compatible air data system is interfaced to the KLN89 B the Other 12 OTH 12 page displays pressure and density altitude directly for the present conditions a 22 y 1910207 gt C U N 9 e 4 5 6 THE CALCULATOR 6 CAL 6 PAGE The CAL 6 page is used to determine the true airspeed TAS of the aircraft To calculate the true airspeed TAS 1 Turnon the cursor lesr 2 Enter the aircrafts calibrated airspeed by using the right inner 4 27 Advanced GPS Operation knob figure 4 89 If the calibrated airspeed isn t known use the indicated airspeed For most aircraft
251. receiver would have to look for each of the 24 satellites to determine which ones could be used Almanac data is very crude data which describes the approximate orbital position of the satellites Each of the 24 satellites transmits the almanac data for all satellites so a GPS receiver has only to listen to one satellite in order to know which satellites are visible in the sky at that particular time Almanac data is good for about six months so when you turn the receiver off then back on a month later it will know what satellites to look for Ephemeris data is very precise data which each satellite transmits to tell the GPS receiver exactly where it is and what its orbital parame ters will be for about the next four hours Each satellite transmits its own unique ephemeris data KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Appendix F GPS SYSTEM SEGMENTS The GPS system is composed of three segments the Space Segment the Control Segment and the User Segment The Space Segment consists of the 24 NAVSTAR satellites which orbit the earth at an altitude of 10 898 nautical miles The satellite orbits are very precisely planned so that the entire surface of the earth may use the GPS system 24 hours a day every day There are almost always more than six satellites in view from anywhere on Earth The Control Segment consists of a network of ground based monitor ing and control stations The Master Control Station is located in Colorado Springs Colo
252. ress the button twice The following example will be used to illustrate how to use the VNAV feature You are using the KLN 89 B to fly direct to your destination airport Dubuque Municipal air port KDBQ located in Dubuque lowa You are presently about 65 nautical miles west of Dubuque flying at 7500 feet MSL figure 4 58 You desire to use the VNAV to provide vertical guidance to Dubuquess traffic pattern altitude of 1900 feet MSL APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET To use VNAV on a Direct To Figure 4 58 1 Select the ALT 2 page by pressing the button twice figure 4 59 The aircraft s actu al altitude 7500 feet is displayed on the left side of line 2 If the displayed altitude is incorrect it is probably because you have not Figure 4 59 recently updated the KLN 89 B s altimeter baro setting on the ALT 1 page see section 3 3 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET NOTE There may be some difference less than 100 feet between the indicated altitude and the aircraft s actual altitude if the altitude input to the KLN 89 B is from an altitude encoder because these encoders only provide altitude in 100 foot increments The identifier for the active waypoint KDBQ is automatically dis played on the ALT 2 page Prior to programming a VNAV operation the top of the page displays that the VNAV is inactive Vnv Inactive 4 17 y 1910207 gt C U N
253. rest VOR e D T Lam ad Ln 1 00121900 49 218 9 Lines 3 4 In place of the latitude longitude line 3 is blank and line 4 displays the magnetic bearing to or the magnetic radial from the VOR and the distance Placing the cursor over the radial bearing field and pressing toggles between radial from and bearing to station 3 11 2 2 The VOR 2 Page See figure 3 156 Line 1 The VOR identifier preceded APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH by an arrow if it is the active waypoint Figure 3 156 Line 2 The published magnetic station declination of the VOR Magnetic station declination is another way to say the published mag netic variation for the VOR Line 4 The magnetic bearing to or the magnetic radial from the VOR and the distance Placing the cursor over the radial bearing field and pressing toggles between radial from and bearing to station 3 53 gt o g Og 2 e G co Basic GPS Operation 3 11 3 NDB PAGES Two pages of information may be displayed for each NDB in the KLN 89 B Sample NDB pages are shown in figures 3 157 through 3 159 3 11 3 1 The NDB 1 Page See figure 3 157 Line 1 The NDB identifier preceded by an arrow if it is the active waypoint To the right of the identifier is the frequency of the NDB in kilohertz APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Line 2 The name of the NDB Lines 3 4 The latitude and
254. rest of the flight plan as required 5 2 5 EXAMPLE OF A STAR PROCEDURE To illustrate the use of the KLN 89B with STAR procedures the steps required to fly Acton Four arrival to Dallas Fort Worth International will be shown in this section This procedure is considerably simpler than the SID example shown in section 5 2 4 For this example assume that the aircraft departs from El Paso Texas and files for the Acton Four arrival with the Wink transition Use the fol lowing steps to fly this procedure with the KLN 89B and refer to the chart for this STAR figure 5 44 1 Load the STAR into the flight plan as described in section 5 2 2 2 This STAR is very simple and the KLN 89B will automatically guide the aircraft along the proper route until the AQN VOR 3 Long before reaching AQN examine this procedure and notice that there are two different routes depending on what type of air craft is flying the STAR Turbojets fly to CREEK intersection while non turbojets fly to RENDY intersection The data base in the KLN 89B has the sequence of waypoints for the turbojet procedure NOT the sequence for non turbojets Chapter 5 NOTE It is extremely rare to have a different path over the ground for turbojets and non turbojets but be sure to cross check with your paper charts N er d o cO a e a a e p 5 36 Approaches and SID STARs KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide sasodi
255. roach Remember the KLN 89B will not automatically sequence past the missed approach point This is shown on the NAV 4 page by not showing any lines connecting waypoints that are past the MAP To perform the published missed approach procedure press to bring up the direct to page The default waypoint will be the first waypoint of the missed approach procedure In this case the first waypoint is LAX Confirm this waypoint as the direct to waypoint and press ENT J Upon reaching LAX the KLN 89B will sequence to the next way point in the missed approach procedure INISH In this example there is no holding pattern published for the missed approach so you can expect further instructions upon reaching INISH NOTE If ATC gives you instructions for a missed approach that is different from the published missed approach procedure it is always possible for you to select a different direct to waypoint than the default direct to waypoint 5 15 G 13 dey9 gt 9 e cD 9 2 e gt c gt JJ Chapter 5 N er o cO a e a a e p Approaches and SID STARs 5 1 5 EXAMPLE APPROACH OFF AIRPORT NAVAID An approach that is quite common is an approach that is based off of an off airport navaid An example of this is the VOR RWY 22 approach to Clovis New Mexico Municipal airport KCVN To fly this procedure as published use the
256. rocess 4 30 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Advanced GPS Operation To delete a user defined waypoint that is no longer needed see section 3 14 2 Viewing and Deleting User Waypoints and Waypoint Remarks 4 6 1 CREATING A WAYPOINT AT YOUR PRESENT POSITION Creating a waypoint at your present position is the simplest possible way to create a user defined waypoint This is nice for remembering a spot you are at Let s suppose you re at a private strip that you want to name VALLY To create a user defined waypoint at your present position 1 Select the NAV 2 page present position and press the button page like the one in figure 4 97 will be displayed with your latitude and longitude at the time you pressed the button The Figure 4 97 user defined waypoint is initially given the name USR where is the first available number between 01 and 99 VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL 2 If you wish to use this waypoint name press and the Figure 4 98 waypoint creation is complete figure 4 98 If you want to choose your own name for it turn the right inner knob to select the HE first character of the identifier VOR NDB INT USR NAV FPL figure 4 99 Remember that Figure 4 99 when the cursor is on the right inner knob changes the character and the right outer knob moves the cursor around Z M y 191020 gt co U N 9 e
257. rs and some air data computers output pressure altitude it is often required that you manually input the proper baro setting in order to get accurate altitude functions The KLN 89 B functions which use the altitude input are special use airspace SUA alerting altitude alerting and vertical navigation VNAV It is a good idea to update the altimeter baro setting on the ALT 1 page each time you make a change to the aircraft s altimeter setting To Change the Baro Setting 1 Press The ALT 1 page will be displayed with the cursor over the altimeter baro setting field figure 3 169 NOTE The SET 8 page figure 3 170 is used to set the unit of measure for various parameters The altimeter barometric setting can be set to inches of Mercury millibars mB or hec topascals hP Altitude airport APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH elevation and runway lengths can be Figure 3 170 set to feet ft or meters m Finally distances and velocities can be set to nautical miles nm and knots kt or kilometers km and kilometers hour k h To change a unit of mea sure select the SET 8 page turn on the cursor CRSR and move it over the desired unit of measure using the right outer knob turn the right inner knob to select the desired unit of measure and turn the cur sor off again This format for the SET 8 page applies to ORS 02 software OHS 01 software only allows the selection of barometric set ting units
258. rting for Direct To Operation and 4 2 2 Turn Anticipation and Waypoint Alerting The remote message annunciator is on whenever the message prompt is on See section 3 5 3 66 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation In addition there may be a NAV GPS switch annunciator to switch a CDI or HSI indicator s navigation source between the KLN 89 B and a VOR ILS system and a GPS APR switch annunciator which allows display and control of the KLN 89B approach modes see section 5 1 3 16 AVIONICS BUS VOLTAGE ALERTING The SET 10 page serves as a monitor of your avionics power bus It gives you a digital readout of the voltage supplied to your avionics down to tenths of volts You will find this feature valuable as an extra layer of security in cases of electrical or charging system problems A voltage alert feature is also available on this page to warn you of an electrical system problem regardless of whether you are viewing the SET 10 page or not It is set up so that the avionics bus voltage must drop below the alert limit for a certain length of time This time delay is so that brief power interruptions don t trigger the voltage alert The alert voltage and the alert delay are set at the time of installation and stored in the KLN 89 B configuration module As the pilot your two options are to have the voltage alert disabled or to have it enabled with the predefined voltage and time delay values To enable the voltage
259. ry con venient means to store and easily access aeronautical information Want to know the name of the airport the nearest city or the airport elevation Just unleash the power of the KLN 89 B and display the information right on the screen Thirdly the KLN 89B data base stores non precision approaches in their proper sequence This allows you to select an approach as a whole rather than entering the approach waypoint by waypoint 2 2 DATA BASE CONTENTS AND COVERAGE AREAS There are four data base coverage areas available for the KLN 89 B They are referred to as the Americas North data base the Americas South data base the Atlantic data base and the Pacific data base The International Civil Aviation Organization ICAO and Aeronautical Radio Inc ARINC break the world into the ten geographic regions shown in figure 2 1 The KLN 89 B Americas North data base con tains aeronautical information for the group of ICAO regions consisting of Canada USA and Latin America The KLN 89 B Americas South data base contains aeronautical information for the group of ICAO regions consisting of USA Latin America and South America The KLN 89 B Atlantic data base provides information for the ICAO regions Europe Africa East Europe and Mid East Likewise the Pacific data base contains information for East Europe Mid East Pacific and South Pacific 2 1 18ydeu eL D rmja D UJ 9 e L1 Data Base The fol
260. s occurring and the APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Direct To waypoint is not in FPL Figure 4 29 0 If in doubt as to whether or not Direct To operation is occurring view the NAV 1 page If the top line shows the amp symbol figure 4 29 instead of a from waypoint figure 4 30 then Direct To navi Guss NSS NT CR CT gation is occurring lf it is desired Figure 4 30 4 8 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Advanced GPS Operation to cancel the Direct To operation and operate from the active flight plan press gt Peta and then Lest e As flight plan waypoints are reached the active leg symbol auto matically shifts to the next leg e f the flight plan contains more waypoints than can be displayed on the screen at one time the page will automatically scroll as progress is made along the flight APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH plan so that the active leg is Figure 4 31 always displayed figure 4 31 e The last waypoint in the flight plan is always displayed at the bot tom of the FPL 0 page even if all of the waypoints in the flight plan can t be displayed on the page at one time To view inter mediate waypoints turn the cursor on and use the right outer knob to manually scroll through all of the waypoints as desired If scrolling is performed all the way to the end of the flight plan a blank waypoint position will exist so that a waypoint may be added to the end of the flight pla
261. se Lost This message appears when the KLN 89 B determines that the internal memory backup battery is dead or that some other internal failure has occurred which has caused user entered way points flight plans and waypoint remarks to be lost User Data Lost This message appears when the KLN 89 B deter mines that the internal memory backup battery is dead or that some other internal failure has occurred which has caused user data such as page setups to be lost Using Emergency Battery This message appears when the back up battery pack if installed is supplying unit power Vnv Alert Vertical Navigation Alert This message appears when a VNAV operation has been programmed on the ALT 2 page and the esti mated time to start the climb or descent is approximately 90 seconds This message serves as notification to select the ALT 2 page so that the VNAV operation may be executed This message does not appear if the ALT 2 page is already being displayed VNAV status can also be dis played on the NAV 1 page WPT Annunciator Fail This message appears when there is a failure of the KLN 89 B WPT annunciator drive circuitry To determine if way point alerting is being given you will need to look at the KLN 89 B display because the annunciator will not be working if this message has been given Service the KLN 89 B as soon as possible WPT Deleted This message appears when a waypoint used in a flight plan or the active waypoin
262. se the right outer and inner knobs to select the Airport 1 APT 1 page figure 3 68 Actually the airport identifier can be entered on any of the Airport pages but we ll use the APT 1 Figure 3 68 since it displays the airport name and city 2 Turn on the cursor es and make sure the right inner knob is pushed in The cursor will appear over the first character of the airport identifier figure 3 69 Figure 3 69 3 Turn the right inner knob to select a as the first character figure 3 0 You may turn the knob either clockwise Or counterclock APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH wise and the letters Figure 3 70 numbers wrap around with a blank character separating the 9 and the A Notice that as you turn through letters the KLN 89 B automatically fills in the identifier of the first waypoint in alohanumeric order in the data APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 3 21 C T Lom ad 00121900 49 218 9 basic GPS Operation base which matches what you ve entered so far in this case Hall Airport in Kaufman Texas Go ahead and experiment a little bit APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 4 Use the right outer knob to move Figure 3 71 the cursor to the second character and select an O figure 3 71 5 Use the same process to select an R and then a D figure
263. sed approach point Eventually the map scale changes to 1 NM The following steps are followed if a missed approach is required 9 The missed approach instructions call for a climbing left turn to a heading of 110 until intercepting the 061 inbound course to the missed approach holding fix SCUMY To fly this with the KLN 89B it will be necessary to put the KLN 89B into the OBS mode and make SCUMY the active waypoint Change the selected course on the external CDI or HSI to 061 10 Once the aircraft reaches SCUMY you will need to perform a holding pattern entry suitable for this holding pattern and set the selected course to 241 for the holding pattern 13 dey9 gt 9 e cD 9 2 e gt c gt JJ 5 21 Chapter 5 N er d o cO a e a a e p Approaches and SID STARs 5 1 8 EXAMPLE APPROACH DME ARC DME arc procedures with the KLN 89B are completely different from using traditional VOR and DME equipment Don t worry though because DME arc procedures using the KLN 89B are also easier than using traditional equipment This is because the KLN 89B pro vides left right guidance around the arc No more having to watch distance in one place and radial in another When being vectored a DME arc is really a whole bunch of initial approach fixes placed one next to each other to form an arc Very rarely do
264. sing the procedure described in section 5 1 1 When the distance from the present position to the destination airport reaches 30 NM the KLN 89B will automatically arm the approach mode The CDI scale factor will transition to 1 0 NM and the KLN 89B will provide more sensitive integrity monitoring You also press to update the barometric information When the aircraft is 4 NM from the BQM VOR the KLN 89B will give a message reminding you to select the OBS mode The OBS mode is required for the procedure turn After passing BQM select the outbound course of 068 on the external CDI or HSI The aircraft is now headed outbound for the procedure turn As soon a practical you will need to change the active waypoint to FF24 the final approach fix This is done by pulling out on the right inner knob and scanning until FF24f is displayed in the win dow figure 5 20 then pressing a then pressing et The OBS course will still be what is select h CD the external CDI or HSI Figure 5 20 gt Z M APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH With the OBS mode selected and FF24 as the active waypoint it is possible to fly the procedure turn Allow enough distance past FF24 to complete the procedure turn and still be 2 NM away before reaching the FAF After completing the outbound portion of the procedure turn change the selected course to the inbound course of 248 on the external CDI or HSI Once established on the i
265. sition unless it specifically states that the knob should be in the out position Therefore the words rotate the right inner knob mean to turn the right inner knob while the knob is in the in position 3 4 2 DATA ENTRY Now that you ve learned how to select the desired page you re ready to learn the means of entering data It is necessary to enter data for example in order to specify a waypoint of your choice to go Direct To The general procedure for entering a waypoint identifier is described below and is shown in fig ures 3 38 through 3 46 for entering a waypoint in this case First Flight air port in North Carolina identifier KFFA on the Calculator CAL 1 page APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 3 38 To enter a waypoint identifier 1 If the cursor is not on the screen figure 3 38 press to turn on the cursor function figure 3 39 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 3 39 3 13 e D T Lom ad 00121900 49 218 9 basic GPS Operation 2 If required rotate the right outer knob to position the cursor figure 3 40 3 Rotate the right inner knob to INT USR ACT NAV FPL select the first character of the Fiqure 3 40 waypoint identifier figure 3 41 9 4 Turn the right outer knob click clockwise to move the cursor to the second character position figure 3 42 INT USR ACT NAV FPL Figure 3 41 5 Hotate the right in
266. sociated with a DME arc Once an arc waypoint is chosen the KLN 89B determines what radial of the reference VOR the aircraft is presently located on A waypoint is created that is located at the intersection of the pre sent radial and the DME arc This waypoint is the first waypoint in the list of waypoints presented on the APT 8 page before loading APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 5 22 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Approaches and SID STARs NC 1 18 AUG 1994 Amdt 8A 94006 OWATONNA MUNI OW A VOR RWY 12 Ai 5426 FAA OWATONNA MINNESOTA MINNEAPOLIS CENTER PRAGS 132 35 307 3 UNICOM 122 7 CTAF AWOS 3 128 325 10 ieee ee A 3000 NoPT F N FOW I2 Arc 2 MANKATO 110 8 MKT Chan 45 HALFWAY 111 2 FOW gt Chan 49 Lu MOT FOR MAVIGATTQA Holding Pattern VOR DME Climb to 2000 then climbing left turn to 3000 direct FOW VOR DME and hold amp 310 FOW m B i 130 4 7 from FAF 1135 1580 1 1580 14 6 15801 5 s001 CIRCLING 1620 1 1660 1 1660 14 1700 2 472 500 1 512 600 1 512 600 14 552 500 2 REIL 12 MIR Rey A FAF to MAP 6 7 NM Knots 60 90 120 150 180 insec ea 128 321 221 2 14 VOR RWY 1 2 44 07 93 15 w OWATONNA MINNESOTA OWATONNA MUNI OW A Reproduced with permission of Jeppese
267. ssage will be displayed if the altitude input becomes invalid during operation APR ACTV Annunciator Fail This message appears when there is a failure of the KLN 89B ACTV annunciator drive circuitry Service unit as soon as possible APR ARM Annunciator Fail This message appears when there is a failure of the KLN 89B ARM annunciator drive circuitry Service unit as soon as possible Arm GPS Approach If the approach ARM mode has been disarmed the KLN 89B will remind you to arm the approach mode when the aircraft is 3 nautical miles from the Final Approach Fix FAF Arm the approach mode if it is desired to use the KLN 89B for conducting an approach b 1 xipuaddy cD e N c g cD cD e N 9 e cD o Appendix B o a c 7 0 a c c 7 0 Appendix Bad Satellite Geometry And RAIM Not Available This message appears only when the KLN 89B is in the approach active mode RAIM is not available and the satellite geometry has further degraded to cause more uncertainty of the aircraft position This message may be followed by a NAV flag in a couple of minutes if conditions continue to degrade Bad Satellite Geometry See EPE on OTH 1 page This message appears following a message that RAIM is not available This means that the geometry of the satellites is such that the possible error in position is greater than allowed for IFR
268. store the selections CAUTION The NAV 4 page does not display weather terrain or other data 3 11 WAYPOINT PAGES NOTE Each of the waypoint page types includes a cyclic field which displays present magnetic bearing to or magnetic heading from the waypoint Due to great circle courses and magnetic variation differences between present position and the active waypoint the To bearing and From radial may not be exactly 180 different from each other This condition is most likely to occur when long distances are involved and or you are operating in very northerly or southerly latitudes See section 3 10 1 and figure 3 118 for more details 3 11 1 AIRPORT PAGES 3 11 1 1 The Airport 1 APT 1 Page See figure 3 136 Line 1 The ICAO identifier see section 2 3 of the airport an arrow precedes the identifier if it is the active waypoint The airport elevation above MSL in feet or meters which is rounded to the nearest 10 feet or Figure 3 136 nearest meter APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Line 2 The name of the airport Line 3 The city where the airport is located Line 4 The State if the airport is located in the U S the Province if located in Canada or the country if outside the U S and Canada A listing of the abbreviations used for States Provinces and countries is contained in Appendix D The right side of line 4 will read HELIPORT if applicable MILITARY if it is a mili SGD tary airport
269. t no longer exists as a result of updating the data base The blank space is filled in with the waypoint identifier The waypoint is deleted from flight plans in which it was used B 6 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Appendix APPENDIX C SCRATCHPAD MESSAGES NOTE Those messages marked with a double dagger symbol refer to the KLN 89B only Active Wpt Active Waypoint Appears when you attempt to delete a user defined waypoint on the OTH 4 page if the waypoint is the active waypoint the waypoint you are navigating to Another waypoint must be made the active waypoint before this waypoint can be deleted from the user defined waypoint list D Base Expire Data Base Expired Appears whenever the pilot attempts to select an approach from the data base on the APT 8 or ACT 8 page and the data base has expired D gt CRS XXX Direct To Course XXX Appears when the KLN 89B is in the OBS mode and is interfaced with an external indicator for which the KLN 89B cannot change the selected course and the pilot per forms a Direct To operation Since the KLN 89B cannot change the selected course to the direct to course the KLN 89B gives you this message telling you the OBS value that will take the aircraft direct to the active waypoint Dup Ident Duplicate Identifier Appears when you select a waypoint identifier on one of the waypoint type pages if there is more than one waypoint of that waypoint type having the same
270. t at your present position 3 30 EE N 4 A ca c p a Be lt basic GPS Operation 3 10 3 THE NAVIGATION 3 NAV 3 PAGE The Navigation NAV 3 page shows you several important times pertaining to your flight figure 3 123 Line Ts The current system time zone APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH and time The time zone may be Figure 3 123 changed by turning the cursor e8sR on over it and turning the right inner knob All times shown on the NAV 3 page are in terms of the system time zone except for the flight time which is an elapsed time Line 2 The time of departure This is the time when a valid ground speed was first greater than 30 knots typically during takeoff Line 3 Estimated time of arrival at your destination lf the active waypoint is not part of the active flight plan the active waypoint will be the destination Otherwise the last waypoint in your active flight plan will be the destination Line 4 The elapsed flight time which will be the hours and minutes since the departure time 3 10 4 THE NAVIGATION 4 NAV 4 PAGE The NAV 4 page is a graphical moving map which offers excellent bird s eye view situational awareness to you as the pilot in com mand This page can show you where you are and where you re headed relative to your active flight plan or leg your destination way point s the nearby airports and VORs and e
271. t side of the screen line 3 When in the Leg mode it displays Leg figure 4 119 and when in the OBS mode it displays the selected magnetic course figure 4 120 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 4 120 4 7 1 SELECTING THE LEG MODE OR THE OBS MODE To change course modes 1 Press the button 2 Ifthe KLN 89 B was previously in the Leg mode it will now be in the OBS mode and vice versa 4 7 2 THE LEG MODE The following are the characteristics of the Leg Mode 1 The default course deviation indicator CDI sensitivity is plus and minus five nautical miles full scale This applies to the CDI on the NAV 1 page as well as any external CDIs or HSls interfaced to the KLN 89 B If the CDI or HSI has five dots left and right of the center position then each dot represents one nautical mile of deviation 4 35 y 1e1deu gt C U N 9 e Chapter 4 e a L e c e a C5 ce cS lt Advanced GPS Operation Navigation is provided along the great circle path between two waypoints As you probably know great circle navigation is the shortest distance between two points located on the earth s surface In the case of Direct To operation the from waypoint is not displayed but it is the point where Direct To operation was initiated The course to fly while in this mode is referred to as the
272. tal air temperature the air temperature including heat rise due to compressibility This is the temperature measured directly by the outside air temperature OAT probe Prs Pressure altitude to nearest 100 feet or 10 meters Den Density altitude to nearest 100 feet 10 meters 4 10 MAGNETIC VARIATION The KLN 89 B s primary coverage area is from N 74 to S 60 as was shown in figure 3 1 Magnetic variation is automatically computed within this coverage area when Mag Var is in the default AUTO mode on the SET 2 page Navigation outside this area is automatically referenced to true North unless a manual input of magnetic variation is made on the SET 2 page The following message will be displayed on the Message page Magnetic Var Invalid Nav Data Referenced To True North A user defined magnetic variation may be entered on line 4 of the SET 2 page When a user entered magnetic variation of 0 degrees is being used the following message will be displayed on the Message page Nav Data Referenced To True North When a user defined magnetic variation other than 0 degrees is being used the following message will be displayed Nav Data Referenced To User Defined Mag Var There are two exceptions when a user defined magnetic variation will not be used for navigation When the active waypoint is part of an approach 4 46 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Advanced GPS Operation procedure the magnetic variation for the published appro
273. the cursor is initially over the APT field so you may press then press immediately to access the nearest airports Selecting any of the waypoint types APT VOR NDB INT or USR takes you immediately to the way point page for the first nearest waypoint of that type for example the nearest airport figure 3 89 Figure 3 89 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 3 8 1 VIEWING THE NEAREST WAYPOINTS There are actually two waypoint scan lists for airports VORs NDBs intersections and user defined waypoints These two lists are the complete list and the nearest list The complete list contains all of the waypoints in the data base for a waypoint type all the airports for example The nearest list consists of the nine nearest waypoints of that type to your present position Therefore if you are in the near est airport list it will contain the nine nearest airports relative to your location The nearest list is positioned in front of the complete list That is instead of using the button you may scan backwards turn the right inner knob counterclockwise while in the pulled out position through the complete list to reach the nearest list You will know when you have reached the nearest list because the top middle por tion of the waypoint page will flash the relative position of the waypoint to your position 1 indicates nearest figure 3 89 while 9 indicates the ninth nearest figure 3 90 As
274. the difference between the calibrated airspeed and the indicated airspeed is small at cruise airspeeds APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV Figure 4 89 3 Use the right outer knob to move the cursor to the Prs field and then use the right inner knob to enter the aircraft s pressure altitude If the pressure altitude was previously calculated on the CAL 4 page or entered on the CAL 5 page it will already be displayed 4 Move the cursor to the first Temp position and then enter the outside air temperature degrees C by using the right inner and outer knobs figure 4 90 The first digit of the temperature is either 0 if the temperature is above zero or if the tempera ture is below zero For maximum accuracy the total air tempera I ture should be entered This is u the temperature of air including the effect of heating due to the aircraft s movement through the air The temperature read on a standard outside air temperature gauge found on most piston air craft is total air temperature Since the difference between static air temperature and the observed air temperature or total air temperature is usually negligible any temperature entered on the CAL 5 page is transferred to this page The true airspeed TAS is now displayed NOTE If a compatible air data system is interfaced to the KLN89 B true airspeed TAS is displayed directly on the Other 11 OTH 11 page for the present conditions lt
275. the list by turning on Figure 3 189 the cursor lesr and turning the right outer knob to scroll through the list NAV FPL CAL SET VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET To delete a user defined waypoint ZEE from the OTH 4 page 1 Turn on the cursor and position it Figure 3 190 over the desired waypoint figure 3 189 If there are more than three user defined waypoints you will have to scroll the cursor down the list C D T Lam ad E uoljeiadg 49 218 9 VOR NDB INT USR ACT FPL CAL SET 2 Press Pun The KLN 89 B will Figure 3 191 ask if you wish to delete that user waypoint figure 3 190 If the waypoint is active or used in a flight plan the deletion will not be allowed and you will receive a VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET scratchpad message telling you this figure 3 191 3 Press to approve the deletion figure 3 192 3 14 2 2 The OTH 5 Page VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET An example of an OTH 5 page is Figure 3 193 shown in figure 3 193 All waypoints with remarks are listed in alphanumeric order Remarks can be stored for airports on the APT 3 page or user defined waypoints on the USR 3 page If the way 3 65 gt gt Og e gt co Basic GPS Operation point is an airport then an A is displayed on the right side likewise a U represents a user defined way
276. ting the data base 2 4 User waypoints USR 0 page 3 56 USR 1 page 3 56 USR 2 page 3 56 USR 3 page 3 57 UTC See Time zones V Vectors 5 18 VNAV vertical navigation 4 17 Voltage alerting 3 67 VOR 1 page 3 53 VOR 2 page 3 53 VOR data Bearing and distance 3 53 Frequency 3 53 Identifier 3 53 Latitude longitude 3 53 Magnetic station declination 3 53 Map display of 3 44 Name 3 53 Nearest 3 27 W Waypoint alerting 3 35 4 10 Waypoint identifier entry 3 13 Waypoint identifiers 2 4 Waypoint pages Active waypoint 4 11 Airport 3 45 Intersection 3 55 NDB 3 54 Selecting waypoint pages 3 21 3 22 3 23 3 24 User defined waypoint 3 56 VOR 3 53 I 11 Index Waypoint scanning window 3 44 Waypoints Adding to flight plan 4 5 Creating user waypoint 4 30 Deleting from flight plan 4 6 Deleting user waypoint 3 64 Duplicate 3 15 From and To waypoints 3 34 3 36 4 8 Selecting and scanning 3 21 3 22 3 23 3 24 Viewing user waypoints 3 64 Viewing waypoint in active flight plan FPL 0 4 11 Wind 4 28 4 46 X Y I 12 Honeywell International Inc One Technology Center 23500 West 105th Street Olathe Kansas 66061 FAX 913 791 1302 Telephone 913 782 0400 Copyright 1997 2002 Honeywell International Inc All rights reserved 006 08786 0000 Rev 5 9 02 Honeywell
277. tion El above the hori zon for each satellite is provided in the right column and will range from 5 to 90 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH e The local azimuth Az of the Figure 3 187 satellite relative to your present position referenced to true north rather than magnetic north For example in figure 3 187 satellite SV number 25 has an azimuth of 198 and is therefore south southwest of you NOTE The OTH 3 page predicts if and when RAIM Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring capability will be available when you are ready to shoot a non precision approach at your destination airport See section 5 1 9 for more information on using OTH 3 page 3 14 2 VIEWING AND DELETING USER WAYPOINTS AND WAYPOINT REMARKS The OTH 4 and OTH 5 pages list the user defined waypoints and waypoint remarks respectively which are currently stored in the KLN 89 B s memory 3 64 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation 3 14 2 1 The OTH 4 Page An example of an OTH 4 page is shown in figure 3 188 All currently stored user defined waypoints are listed in alohanumeric order If the user defined waypoint is the active MD MM waypoint an arrow follows the Figure 3 188 identifier If the waypoint is used in one or more flight plans then the number of the first flight plan in which it is used is displayed on the right side If there are more than three user waypoints in storage you can see the rest of
278. to HaCaT acquire the GPS satellites and to make Figure 3 23 its initial calculation of your position When the KLN 89 B reaches a NAV ready status and is able to navigate the NAV 2 page will display your pre sent position relative to the nearest VOR figure 3 24 Verity that the pre APT VOR NOB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH sent position shown on the NAV 2 Figure 3 24 page Is correct NOTE In order to reach a Nav ready status the aircraft must be away from obstructions blocking the GPS antenna s view of required satel lites If the KLN 89 B fails to reach a Nav ready status within five minutes refer to section 3 6 Initialization And Time To First Fix 3 3 DISPLAY FORMAT The KLN 89 B uses a Dot Matrix Gas Plasma Display In normal operation the display screen is divided into two segments by a vertical line called the page divider In some cases such as the display of system messages or the turn on and self test sequence the page divider disappears and you have a full screen page Aeronautical information is presented on the screen in the form of pages A page is a presentation of specific data in an organized for mat Various page types are used to display related kinds of data For example one page type is NAV navigation NAV pages show information such as distance groundspeed bearing course and other data relating to navigation Another page type is APT airport APT pages c
279. to activate the approach active mode and change to 0 3 NM scale factor The CDI scale fac tor changes from 1 0 NM to 0 3 NM over the two miles to the FAF Delaying the switch from OBS to Leg mode compresses the scale factor change This will make the transition more abrupt If the switch from OBS to Leg is delayed too long it will not be possible for the KLN 89B to change to the approach active mode 6 8 When the aircraft is 2 NM from the FAF the KLN 89B will verify that the proper integrity is available lf integrity monitoring is available for the approach then the KLN 89B will change to the Approach Active mode This will be annunciated on the external approach status annunciator as well as on the KLN 89B The CDI scale factor will also start to change from 1 0 NM to 0 3 NM Upon reaching TXO the KLN 89B will automatically sequence to RW22 the missed approach point The fix at 8 DME from TXO along the final approach course is not included in the waypoints that come from the data base Since the distance that the KLN 89B is giving you is distance TO the MAP you will need to mentally figure out when the aircraft has reached this point This is done by looking at the along track distances given in the plan view of the approach In this case the fix is 4 1 NM from RW22 Upon reaching this distance you can descend to the MDA for this approach If a missed approach is required for this approach then the following steps wou
280. tton A page with the words DIRECT TO is now displayed on the screen In step 8 you will enter the ICAO identifier of the airport The identifi er will have a K prefix for a Continental U S airport a C prefix for a Canadian airport or a P prefix in some cases for an Alaskan air port if the identifier is all letters For example LAX becomes KLAX For these countries if the identifier contains any numbers there is no prefix For example TX04 is entered TX04 For other areas of the world the airport identifier should be entered identically to how it is charted 8 Rotate the right inner knob until the first character of the airport identifier is displayed Turn the right outer knob one step clock wise to move the flashing segment to the second character position Rotate the right inner knob to select the second charac ter of the identifier Use this procedure to enter the complete airport identifier Press The display will change to a page showing the identi fier name city and state country of the airport just entered Confirm that the correct airport is displayed Press a second time to approve the airport data A Navigation page specifically the NAV 1 page is now on the screen It displays the desired ground track actual ground track bearing and ETE to the destination airport In addition it displays a course deviation indicator CDI See wasn t that easy Introduction HOW TO INDEX This
281. ture section 3 8 2 and the SUA alerting feature section 3 17 will indicate the altitude limits of the airspace to you Section 3 17 will also help you understand more about the KLN 89 B special use airspace features as well as the types of SUA that are included in the KLN 89 B data base 3 43 e D T Lom ad 00121900 49 218 9 d N e A ca c m re a Be lt basic GPS Operation NOTE Only the outer lateral boundaries are displayed for Class B Class C CTA and TMA airspace The actual SUA may have differ ent lateral limits smaller depending on your present altitude In the same manner the nearest VORs and or airports may be selected by first using the right outer knob to move the cursor over the VOR or APT selection field and then using the right inner knob to select on or off The example in figure 3 133 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH shows SUAs and airports having Figure 3 133 been selected When the desired selections have been made press the button to remove the menu from the screen figure 3 134 Notice that the nearest airports are depicted with a small APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH symbol while the VORs are shown as Figure 3 134 a small box One last item of interest on this page you may change the active waypoint to any of the flight plan waypoints without having
282. uced Normal navigation is indicated by a NAV NAV A or NAV D GPS state NAV A indicates that the altitude input is being used in the position solution NAV D indicates that besides calculation position the receiver is collecting and storing in its memory additional data from the satellites called ephemeris and almanac data Line 2 of the OTH 1 page displays the present GPS derived altitude that is the altitude that is being indicated by the GPS position solution WARNING Do not use the GPS derived altitude for navigation Due to Selective Availability position degradation and other fac tors the GPS altitude is normally 300 feet or more in error which is unacceptable for vertical navigation Lines 3 and 4 of the OTH 1 page dis play the KLN 89 B s estimated position error The KLN 89 B s posi tion error depends upon such factors as the number of satellites being APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH received the strength of the GPS sig Figure 3 184 nals and the geometry of the satellites presently being used for navigation Figures 3 184 3 185 and 3 186 show a representative example of a set of APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH OTH 2 pages There will be three Figure 3 185 OTH 2 pages if more than six satellites are being received as in this example The following information is displayed for each satellite on the OTH 2 pages APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Figure 3 186 3 63
283. uide Index L Latitude longitude conversion table E 1 Leg mode 4 35 Lighting runway 3 48 Loading Approach 5 5 SID 5 30 STAR 5 32 Locator outer marker LOM 3 55 m missed approach point identifier suffix 5 9 Mach 4 45 Magnetic variation 4 46 Map display 3 40 MAP missed approach point 3 33 3 35 5 9 MAHP missed approach holding point 5 9 Message MSG button prompt and page 3 10 3 11 3 17 Messages Appendix B Meters 3 58 Metric units 3 58 Minimum safe altitude MSA 3 59 Missed approach procedure 5 9 Modes navigation Approach Arm 5 2 Approach Active 5 2 OBS 4 36 Leg 4 35 Selecting Leg or OBS mode 4 35 MOVE 5 25 MSA See Minimum safe altitude N Name of navaid or airport 3 45 3 53 3 54 NAV 1 primary navigation page 3 36 NAV 2 present position page 3 39 NAV 3 departure arrival time page 3 40 NAV 4 Graphical MAP page 3 40 NAV GPS switch annunciator 3 66 5 1 Navigation map display 3 40 Navigation pages Moving map NAV 4 page 3 40 Present position NAV 2 page 3 39 Primary navigation NAV 1 page 3 36 Times relating to navigation NAV 3 3 40 7 Index Navigation terminology A 1 NDB 1 page 3 54 NDB 2 page 3 54 NDB data Bearing and distance 3 54 Frequency 3 54 Identifier 3 54 Latitude longitude 3 54 Name 3 54 Nearest 3 27 Nearest Centers 3 31 Flight Service Stations 3 31 Special Use Airspace 3 29 Waypoints 3 27 NOS charts 5 8 NO WPT SEQ 5 9 Non precision approaches See Approaches
284. unction off The right outer knob is rotated to select one of eleven page types for the display These eleven page types are the following Chapter Name Page Range Page Type Page Functions APT 1 6 Airport Directory of published airports VOR 1 2 VOR Directory of published VOR stations NDB 1 2 NDB Directory of published non directional beacons NDB INT 1 2 Intersections Directory of published named intersections USR 0 3 User Waypoint Directory of user defined waypoints ACT Active Waypoint Information about the active waypoint NAV 1 4 Navigation Navigation data FPL 0 25 Flight Plan Active and stored flight plans CAL 1 8 Calculator Distance bearing time and fuel calculator air data calculations based on pilot entered inputs SET 1 11 Setup Setting initial position and date time updating the data base and selecting certain features OTH 1 6 Other Status reports and deleting user wpts and remarks KLN 89B s which are approved for non precision approaches have 8 airport pages A Maries with the type of waypoints in the active flight plan Upto 12 with fuel management system and air data interfaces Hemember that the page type is displayed at the lower left corner of the screen The first three letters of the page type are often used for annunciation on the screen for example CAL represents Calculator page The page type is also annunciated by means of a bar at the bottom of the display which moves as you turn t
285. ur flight plan with this page selected the same airport will be displayed and its position in the nearest airport list will change from 1 to 2 3 4 9 until finally it won t be in the nearest airport list at all The reason for this is that in the event of an actual emergency once you have determined which airport you are heading for you don t want the nearest airport list to update while you are maneuvering or looking up data on the other airport pages for that airport There may be times however when you re flying over unfriendly terrain when you wish to always have the nearest airport displayed on the screen To display the nearest airport continuously 1 Display the nearest airport page by pressing followed by pressing L J 2 Turn on the cursor crsa 3 Rotate the right outer knob clockwise to position the cursor over 1 figure 3 92 As long as the cursor is left in this position Figure 3 92 this page will update so that the nearest airport is always shown as the flight progresses APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 3 8 2 VIEWING THE NEAREST SPECIAL USE AIRSPACES The KLN 89 B data base stores the locations of areas of special use airspace SUA The types of SUA areas stored in the data base and the abbreviations used to denote these areas are the following Class B CLB Class C CLC Control Area used outside USA CTA Terminal Area used outside USA TMA Alert Area ALRT Caution Area
286. values clear all reference points by 2000 feet in areas where the highest refer ence points are 5001 feet MSL or higher The KLN 89 B displays dashes for areas outside the data base coverage area or for areas where the Grid MORA is not defined Line 4 displays the Minimum Enroute Safe Altitude ESA IMPORTANT When the KLN 89 B is in the Leg mode the minimum enroute safe altitude is the highest MSA sector altitude from the pre sent position to the active waypoint then to the destination waypoint along the active flight plan See figure 3 172 When the KLN 89 B is in SES ESA MSL A MSA MSL 1 LONG Figure 3 172 3 59 C D T Lam ad CD 00121900 49 218 9 co x gt Og e gt co Basic GPS Operation the OBS mode the minimum enroute safe altitude is the highest MSA sector altitude from the present position to the active waypoint WARNING The MSA and ESA altitudes displayed are advisory in nature only They should not be relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information Refer to current aero nautical charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes 3 13 VIEWING AND SETTING THE DATE AND TIME The KLN 89 B system time and date should seldom if ever require updating because they are automatically updated when at least one satellite is receiv
287. ven the boundaries of nearby special use airspace The NAV 4 page figure 3 124 is a little bit different than some of the other KLN 89 B pages Instead of displaying the page type and number i e NAV 4 in the lower left corner of the screen an additional piece of nav igation data is displayed here We re Figure 3 124 willing to bet you ll know this is the NAV 4 page anyway because of its unique graphics APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH 3 40 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation The left side of the screen displays the distance to go active way point identifier and mode annunciation either Leg or the OBS selected course just like it usually would but the fourth line is a cyclic field for which you may select Magnetic Desired Track degrees DTK123 Groundspeed knots or kilometers hour 123kt Estimated Time Enroute hours minutes 1 23 Crosstrack Correction 1 217 NOTE Magnetic desired track may only be selected when KLN 89 B is in the Leg navigation mode When the KLN 89 B is in the OBS mode the desired track is the same as the OBS selected course displayed on line 3 To change the data displayed in this cyclic field simply turn on the cursor crsk rotate the right inner knob counterclockwise to position the cur sor over this field figure 4 1 25 and APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH press the button to choose the Figure 3 125 desired information Now we move
288. view the waypoint page for the waypoint entered Press again to approve the waypoint page figure 4 94 VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL 4 f desired select another date using the right inner and outer Figure 4 95 knobs You must press to enter the date figure 4 95 5 f desired select another time zone The sunrise and sunset times for the selected waypoint date and time zone are now dis played figure 4 96 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL Figure 4 96 4 6 CREATING USER DEFINED WAYPOINTS You may create and store up to 500 user defined waypoints These waypoints will be very helpful to you One major application is private use airstrips which are not included in the Jeppesen data base They are also handy for points which you fly over frequently and wish to navigate to For example a crop sprayer would want to store the locations of the fields he or she dusts often There are three ways to create a user defined waypoint If you happen to know the latitude and longitude of the point that is one option The waypoint can also be defined as a radial and distance from another waypoint A third choice is just to store your present position under the identifier you have chosen NOTE Whenever you are in a waypoint entry situation such as a Direct To waypoint or flight plan and you enter an identifier which is not in the data base the KLN 89 B will automatically start the user defined waypoint creation p
289. waypoints are en route waypoints and which are approach waypoints the KLN 89B does not display a colon next to the waypoint number on the FPL 0 page if the waypoint is an approach waypoint It is only possible to replace the existing approach with another one or delete the entire approach from the flight plan To replace an existing approach or delete an approach 1 With the left page displaying the active flight plan FPL 0 turn the cursor on by pressing figure 5 9 2 Move the cursor so that it covers Figure 5 9 the approach header at the top of the approach procedure Once the cursor comes over the approach header it will automatically change to read CHANGE APPR figure 5 10 If you press in this condition the KLN 89B will bring up the APT 8 page that corresponds to the current approach At this point it IS possi APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH ble to select different approach Figure 5 10 procedures different IAFs or both 3 lf you press the button while the cursor is over the approach header it will change to read DELETE APPR figure 5 12 I VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH you press now the KLN 89B Figure 5 11 APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH Z 2 3 9 G 13 dey9 gt 9 e cD 2 e gt c gt Chapter 5 N er d o cO a e a a e p
290. which appears on the Direct To page is chosen by the KLN 89 B according to the following rules 2 lt a b 1 If the Flight Plan O FPL page is displayed on the screen and the cursor is over one of the waypoint identifiers in FPL 0 when IS pressed then that waypoint identifier will appear on the DIR page You will appreciate this feature when you learn to use flight plans in section 4 2 2 If the KLN 89 B is displaying the NAV 4 page and the right inner knob is in the out position then the waypoint highlighted in the lower right hand corner of the NAV 4 map display will be the default waypoint You will also find this feature useful when operating from the active flight plan especially during approaches with the KLN 89B OR If there is any waypoint page APT VOR NDB INT USR or ACT page in view when is pressed then the DIR page will contain the identifier for the waypoint just viewed 3 32 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Basic GPS Operation If none of the conditions above are occurring then 4 When is pressed the waypoint identifier for the current active waypoint will be displayed However if the KLN 89B s active waypoint is the Missed Approach Point and the aircraft has flown past the MAP then the KLN 89B will display the first way point of the missed approach procedure on the Direct To page If there is no active waypoint when is pressed then 5 The Direct To page displays blanks
291. will be the radial that the arc way point is on In the rules above x and yyy are defined as follows For runways with only one approach x will be replaced with an A or a F For run ways that have multiple approaches x will be replaced with V for VOR N for NDB or R for RNAV The letters yyy will be replaced with either the runway identifier e g FF25L or for circling approaches the inbound course to the missed approach point e g MA259 Waypoints along a given radial will be named such that the first three letters are the reference VOR DME and the next two are the DME distance If the distance is greater than 100 NM the order is reversed For example LAX18 is 18 NM from LAX while 26FLW is 126 NM from FLW If the aircraft is not too far from the destination airport the NAV 4 page can be used to determine where some of these waypoints are relative to others in the approach At the time of this writing all of the NOS charts and some Jeppesen charts do not show the special ter minal waypoints that are required for GPS approaches For this reason it is a good idea to understand what the special waypoints are used for and what they mean You may have also noticed that some waypoints have a small letter at the end of the waypoint name The small letter is an aid that we have added to the name of some waypoints to help you recognize important points in the approach These suffixes are displayed on many of the KLN
292. ypoints does not have any unnecessary legs in it 6 The KLN 89B will now provide guidance to the arc intercept point The NAV 4 page displays the entire arc on the screen The por tion that is between the beginning of the arc and the arc intercept is drawn with a dashed line The part that is between the arc inter cept point and the end of the arc APT VOR NDB INT USR ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH is drawn with the normal solid line figure 5 24 7 n some cases may provide radar vectors to the arc The KLN 89B provides a means to define a new intercept point based on the current track of the aircraft over the ground This can be done from either the NAV 4 page or from the FPL 0 page The dashed line displayed on the NAV 4 page will help you to deter mine if ATC is giving you correct vectors e From the NAV 4 page pull out the right inner knob to bring up the waypoint scanning window Turn the right inner knob until the first waypoint of the arc is displayed D011L in this example For approaches this will have a small i appended to the waypoint name If the recalculation is to be done from the FPL 0 page then turn on the cursor and move it over the first waypoint of the arc Chapter 5 N er d o cO a e a a e p 5 24 KLN 89 KLN 89B Pilot s Guide Approaches and SID STARs e From either page press Lr This will change the waypoint to read MOVE

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Chapter 4 Axis 3 Operation  OWNER`S MANUAL MANUEL D`UTILISATION  Intimidator Spot LED 250  HP ProDesk 600 G1 Mini  Progress Lighting P3897-124 Instructions / Assembly  User Recommendations for RF  Tijera mecánica  MHS-CM5  Multi manual  Parts List - Garland  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file